CN113126482A - Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter - Google Patents

Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN113126482A
CN113126482A CN201911421090.0A CN201911421090A CN113126482A CN 113126482 A CN113126482 A CN 113126482A CN 201911421090 A CN201911421090 A CN 201911421090A CN 113126482 A CN113126482 A CN 113126482A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
physical parameter
range
target range
code
measurement value
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
CN201911421090.0A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
钟国诚
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to CN201911421090.0A priority Critical patent/CN113126482A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2020/141401 priority patent/WO2021136374A1/en
Priority to CN202080091274.XA priority patent/CN114930255A/en
Publication of CN113126482A publication Critical patent/CN113126482A/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G05—CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05B—CONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B13/00—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion
    • G05B13/02—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric
    • G05B13/0205—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric not using a model or a simulator of the controlled system
    • G05B13/024—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric not using a model or a simulator of the controlled system in which a parameter or coefficient is automatically adjusted to optimise the performance

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
  • Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
  • Evolutionary Computation (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
  • Indication And Recording Devices For Special Purposes And Tariff Metering Devices (AREA)

Abstract

A control target device includes a variable physical parameter, a sensing unit, and an operation unit. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measured value target range and a corresponding physical parameter range. The sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter to generate a sensing signal. Under the condition that the operation unit receives a control signal functioning to indicate the measured value target range, the operation unit obtains a measured value in response to the sensing signal, and determines the corresponding physical parameter range, in which the variable physical parameter is currently located, based on the control signal and a checking operation for checking a mathematical relationship between the measured value and the measured value target range to cause the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range.

Description

Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
Technical Field
The present disclosure relates to a control target device, and more particularly, to a control target device and method for controlling a variable physical parameter.
Background
The control device is capable of generating a control signal to control a function target included in the control target device. The control target device uses the control signal to control the functional target. The functional target can use at least one of mechanical energy, electrical energy, and optical energy, and can be one of a motor for door control, a relay for power control, and an energy converter for energy conversion. In order to effectively control the functional object, the control target device is capable of obtaining a measurement value provided based on a variable physical parameter. The control-target device may require an improved mechanism to efficiently use the measurements and thereby efficiently control the functional targets.
U.S. Pat. No. 2015/0357887 a1 discloses a product specification setting device and a fan motor having the same. U.S. patent No. 7,411,505B 2 discloses a switch status and radio frequency identification tag.
Disclosure of Invention
An object of the present disclosure is to provide a control target device that effectively controls a variable physical parameter by means of a control signal and a measurement value provided based on the variable physical parameter.
An embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a control target device. The control target device includes a variable physical parameter, a sensing unit, and an operating unit. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measured value target range and a corresponding physical parameter range corresponding to the physical parameter target range. The sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal. The operating unit is coupled to the sensing unit, obtains a first measurement value in response to the first sensing signal on condition that the operating unit receives a control signal functioning to indicate the target range of measurement values, performs a first checking operation for checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value and the target range of measurement values in response to the control signal, and causes the variable physical parameter to enter the target range of physical parameters on condition that the operating unit determines the corresponding physical parameter range in which the variable physical parameter is currently located based on the first checking operation.
Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a variable physical parameter by generating a function signal. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measured value target range and a corresponding physical parameter range corresponding to the physical parameter target range. The method comprises the following steps: sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sense signal; obtaining a first measurement value in response to the first sensing signal on a condition that a control signal serving as an indication of the measurement value target range is received; performing a first checking operation for checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value and the measurement value target range in response to the control signal; and determining, based on the first checking operation, a physical parameter relationship between the variable physical parameter and the corresponding physical parameter range to make a reasonable decision whether the functional signal for causing the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range is to be generated.
Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a variable physical parameter. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measured value target range and a corresponding physical parameter range corresponding to the physical parameter target range. The method comprises the following steps: sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sense signal; obtaining a first measurement value in response to the first sensing signal on a condition that a control signal serving as an indication of the measurement value target range is received; performing a first checking operation for checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value and the measurement value target range in response to the control signal; and causing the variable physical parameter to enter the target range of physical parameters on a condition that the corresponding range of physical parameters in which the variable physical parameter is currently located is determined based on the first checking operation.
Drawings
The disclosure may be better understood with reference to the following drawings
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a control system in various embodiments of the disclosure.
FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in fig. 1.
FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in fig. 1.
Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in fig. 1.
FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram illustrating an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1.
Detailed Description
Please refer to fig. 1, which is a diagram illustrating a control system 901 according to various embodiments of the disclosure. The control system 901 includes a control device 212 and a control target device 130. The control device 212 is used to control the control-target device 130. The control target device 130 includes a variable physical parameter QU1A, a sensing unit 334, and an operation unit 397. The variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized on the basis of a physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by a measured value target range RN1T and a corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET corresponding to the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN 81. The operation unit 397 is coupled to the sensing unit 334. On condition that the operation unit 397 receives a control signal SC81 serving as an indication of the measurement value target range RN1T, the operation unit 397 obtains a first measurement value VN81 in response to the first sense signal SN81 and performs a first checking operation BV81 for checking a first mathematical relationship KV81 between the first measurement value VN81 and the measurement value target range RN1T in response to the control signal SC 81. On the condition that the operating unit 397 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, based on the first checking operation BV81, the operating unit 397 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
Referring to fig. 2, a schematic diagram of an implementation 9011 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1 is shown. Please refer to fig. 1 additionally. In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 associated with the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF 81. The first measurement value VN81 is obtained by the operation unit 397 in the specified measurement value format HH 81.
The measurement target range RN1T has a target range threshold pair DN 1T. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX 1T. The range combination of the measured value target range RN1T and the corresponding measured value range RX1T is equal to the nominal measured value range RD 1N. For example, the measured value target range RN1T, the corresponding measured value range RX1T and the nominal measured value range RD1N are all preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW 81. The nominal measurement value range RD1N has a nominal range threshold pair DD 1A.
The control signal SC81 delivers the target range threshold pair DN1T, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A and a control code CC 1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the target range threshold pair DN 1T. The operation unit 397 obtains the target range threshold pair DN1T from the control signal SC81 and performs the first check operation BV81 by comparing the first measurement VN81 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN 1T.
The operation unit 397 makes a first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement VN81 is within the corresponding measurement range RX1T based on the first checking operation BV 81. On condition that the first logical decision PB81 is affirmative, the operating unit 397 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located. The operating unit 397 obtains the nominal range threshold value pair DD1A from the control signal SC81 and performs a second checking operation BM81 for checking a second mathematical relationship KM81 between the first measured value VN81 and the nominal measured value range RD1N by comparing the first measured value VN81 with the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DD 1A.
The operation unit 397 further makes the first logic decision PB81 based on the second check operation BM 81. The operation unit 397 obtains the control code CC1T from the control signal SC 81. On the condition that the operation unit 397 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the operation unit 397 performs signal generation control GY81 based on the obtained control code CC1T to generate a function signal SG81 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, after the operating unit 397 performs the signal generation control GY81 within the operation time TF81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN 82. The operation unit 397 obtains a second measurement value VN82 in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the second sense signal SN82 within a specified time TG82 after the operation time TF 81. On condition that the operating unit 397 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET within the specified time TG82 at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by comparing the second measured value VN82 with the obtained target range threshold value pair DN1T, the operating unit 397 executes an assurance operation GU81 for causing a physical parameter target range code UN8T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET to be recorded.
The variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable length of time LF 8A. For example, the operation unit 397 is configured to measure the variable time length LF 8A. The variable time length LF8A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ81 and a reference time length LJ 8T. The time length reference range HJ81 is represented by a time length value reference range GJ 81. The reference time length LJ8T is represented by a time length value CL 8T. The control signal SC81 further conveys the time length value CL 8T. The operation unit 397 is configured to obtain the time length value CL8T from the control signal SC81 and to check the numerical relationship KJ81 between the obtained time length value CL8T and the time length value reference range GJ81 to make a second logical decision PE81 whether a counting operation BC8T for controlling a specific time TJ8T is to be performed.
In the condition that the second logical decision PE81 is affirmative, the operation unit 397 performs the counting operation BC8T based on the obtained time length value CL 8T. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, the operation unit 397 reaches the specific time TJ8T based on the counting operation BC8T, and performs a signal generating operation BY91 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET within the specific time TJ 8T.
Please refer to fig. 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9012 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9013 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9014 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9015 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9016 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Please refer to fig. 1 additionally. As shown in fig. 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, each of the implementation structure 9012, the implementation structure 9013, the implementation structure 9014, the implementation structure 9015, and the implementation structure 9016 includes the control device 212 and the control-target device 130.
Please refer to fig. 1 additionally. In some embodiments, the operation unit 397 is configured to perform a physical parameter control function FA81 associated with the physical parameter target range RD1ET and includes a processing unit 331 coupled to the sensing unit 334, an input unit 337 coupled to the processing unit 331, and an output unit 338 coupled to the processing unit 331. The physical parameter control function FA81 is configured to comply with the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 in relation to the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 related to the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF 81.
On condition that the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81 from the control device 212, the processing unit 331 is responsive to the first sense signal SN81 to obtain the first measurement value VN81 in a specified measurement value format HH 81. For example, the specified measurement format HH81 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY 81. The control-target device 130 further includes a function target 335 coupled to the output unit 338, and a storage unit 332 coupled to the processing unit 331. For example, when the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform the sensing signal generation HF81 depending on the sensor sensitivity YW81, the sensing signal generation HF81 being used to generate the first sensing signal SN 81.
The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX 1T. The range combination of the target range RD1ET of the physical parameter and the corresponding range RY1ET of the physical parameter is equal to the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 includes the sensor specification FU11, a nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E for representing the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The range combination of the measured value target range RN1T and the corresponding measured value range RX1T is equal to the nominal measured value range RD 1N.
In some embodiments, the nominal measurement value range RD1N represents the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81, and the first data encoding operation ZX81 for transforming the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, and has a nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. For example, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A is preset with the specified measurement value format HH 81. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T and has a target range threshold pair DN 1T; whereby the measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8.
The target range threshold pair DN1T comprises a first target range threshold DN17 of the measured value target range RN1T and a second target range threshold DN18 relative to the first target range threshold DN17 and is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and a second data encoding operation ZX82 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA 8T. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the measured value target range code EM 1T. The measured value target range RN1T is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the second data encoding operation ZX 82.
In some embodiments, the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 further comprises a physical parameter representation GA8T 1. The physical parameter representation GA8T1 is used to represent the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The storage unit 332 stores the nominal range threshold pair DD1A, has a first memory location YM8T and a second memory location YX8T different from the first memory location YM8T, stores the target range threshold pair DN1T in the first memory location YM8T, and stores a control code CC1T in the second memory location YX 8T.
For example, the first memory location YM8T and the second memory location YX8T are both identified based on the measured value target range code EM 1T. The control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GA8T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX91 for transforming the physical parameter representation GA8T 1. The target range threshold pair DN1T and the control code CC1T are both stored by the storage unit 332 based on the predetermined measured value target range code EM 1T.
The functional object 335 has the variable physical parameter QU 1A. For example, the sensing unit 334 is coupled to the functional target 335. The control signal SC81 further conveys the nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. The processing unit 331 obtains the nominal range threshold pair DD1A from one of the control signal SC81 and the storage unit 332 in response to the control signal SC81, obtains the measured value target range code EM1T from the control signal SC81 in response to the control signal SC81, and performs data acquisition AD8A using the obtained measured value target range code EM1T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T by executing a data acquisition program ND 8A. For example, the data acquisition AD8A is one of a first data acquisition operation AD81 and a second data acquisition operation AD 82. The data acquiring program ND8A is constructed based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8.
The first data acquisition operation AD81 uses the storage unit 332 to access the target range threshold pair DN1T stored in the first memory location YM8T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T. The second data acquisition operation AD82 obtains the target range threshold value pair DN1T by performing a scientific calculation MZ81 using the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 performs the first check operation BV81 based on a first data comparison CD81 between the first measurement VN81 and the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T, and makes a first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement VN81 is within the corresponding measurement range RX1T based on the first check operation BV 81. On condition that the first logical decision PB81 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.
For example, on the condition that the first target range threshold DN17 is different from the second target range threshold DN18 and the first measurement value VN81 is between the first target range threshold DN17 and the second target range threshold DN18, the processing unit 331 makes the first logical decision PB81 to be negative by comparing the first measurement value VN81 with the accessed first measurement range limit data code DN 1A. On the condition that the first target range threshold DN17, the second target range threshold DN18 and the first measured value VN81 are equal, the processing unit 331 makes the first logical decision PB81 negative by comparing the first measured value VN81 with the accessed first measured range limit data code DN 1A.
On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to access the control code CC1T stored in the second memory location YX8T based on the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and performs signal generation control GY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to control the output unit 338 based on the accessed control code CC 1T. The output unit 338 performs a signal generation operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 in response to the signal generation control GY81 to generate a function signal SG81, the function signal SG81 being used to control the function target 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the control device 212 is an external device. The processing unit 331 causes the function target 335 to perform a specified function operation ZH81 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output unit 338. For example, the specified function operation ZH81 is used to cause a trigger event EQ81 to occur. The control device 212 outputs the control signal SC81 in response to the trigger event EQ 81. The nominal measurement value range RD1N is configured to have a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, …. For example, the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, … have a total reference range number NT81, represented by a plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …, respectively, and include the measured value target range RN 1T.
The total reference range number NT81 is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, … include the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, and are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The control signal SC81 further conveys the total reference range number NT 81. The processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the total reference range number NT81 from one of the control signal SC81 and the storage unit 332. The scientific calculation MZ81 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT 81. For example, the total number of reference ranges is greater than or equal to 2. For example, the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 3; the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 4; the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 5; the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 6; and the total reference range number NT11 ≦ 255.
The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG81 to change the variable physical parameter QU1A from a first specific physical parameter QU17 to a second specific physical parameter QU 18. For example, the first specific physical parameter QU17 is within the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET; and the second specific physical parameter QU18 is within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 further includes a corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY for representing the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET. The corresponding measured value range RX1T is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and a fourth data encoding operation ZX83 for converting the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8 TY.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. For example, the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, … include the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The measured value target range RN1T is a first part of the nominal measured value range RD 1N. The corresponding measurement value range RX1T is a second part of the nominal measurement value range RD1N, is adjacent to the measurement value target range RN1T and is complementary to the measurement value target range RN 1T.
The nominal measurement value range RD1N is equal to the range combination of the measurement value target range RN1T and the corresponding measurement value range RX1T complementary to the measurement value target range RN1T and has the nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. For example, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A contains a nominal range threshold DD11 of the nominal measurement value range RD1N and a nominal range threshold DD12 with respect to the nominal range threshold DD11 and is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 on the basis of the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the first data encoding operation ZX 81.
For example, the measurement value target range code EM1T is configured to be equal to an integer. The nominal range threshold DD12 is greater than the nominal range threshold DD 11. The nominal range threshold DD12 and the nominal range threshold DD11 have a relative value VA11 with respect to the nominal range threshold DD 11. The relative value VA11 is equal to the result of the calculation of the nominal range threshold DD12 minus the nominal range threshold DD 11. For example, the target range threshold pair DN1T is preset based on the rated range threshold DD11, the rated range threshold DD12, the integer, and the ratio of the relative value VA11 to the total reference range number NT 81. The scientific calculation MZ81 uses one of the nominal range threshold DD11, the nominal range threshold DD12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.
The processing unit 331 performs a second checking operation BM81 for checking a second mathematical relationship KM81 between the first measurement value VN81 and the nominal measurement value range RD1N on the basis of a second data comparison CD82 between the first measurement value VN81 and the obtained nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. The processing unit 331 further makes the first logic decision PB81 based on the second check operation BM 81.
In some embodiments, after the processing unit 331 performs the signal generation control GY81 within the operation time TF81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN 82. For example, after the processing unit 331 performs the signal generation control GY81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform a sensing signal generation HF82 depending on the sensor sensitivity YW81, the sensing signal generation HF82 being used to generate the second sensing signal SN 82.
The processing unit 331 obtains a second measurement value VN82 in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the second sensing signal SN82 within a specified time TG82 after the operation time TF 81. The processing unit 331 checks the third mathematical relationship KV91 between the second measurement VN82 and the measurement target range RN1T by comparing the second measurement VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T to make a second logical decision PB91 whether the second measurement VN82 is within the measurement target range RN 1T.
On condition that the second logical decision PB91 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 determines within the specified time TG82 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, generates an affirmative operation report RL81, and causes the output unit 338 to output a control response signal SE81 delivering the affirmative operation report RL81, whereby the control response signal SE81 is used to cause the control device 212 to obtain the affirmative operation report RL 81. For example, the positive operation report RL81 represents an operating situation EP81 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A successfully enters the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The processing unit 331 responds to the control signal SC81 by causing the output unit 338 to generate the control response signal SE 81.
In some embodiments, the storage unit 332 further stores a variable physical parameter range code UN 8A. When the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the variable physical parameter range code UN8A is equal to a specific measurement value range code EM14 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …. For example, the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 331 based on a sensing operation ZS 81. The specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. The sensing operation ZS81 performed by the sensing unit 334 is for sensing the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC 81.
For example, the processing unit 331 obtains the specific measurement value range code EM14 before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC 81. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the particular physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the sensing operation ZS81 before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 assigns the obtained particular measurement value range code EM14 to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A by using the storage unit 332. The specific measurement value range code EM14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the specific physical parameter range RD1E 4. The particular measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW 81. For example, the sensing unit 334 performs sensing signal generation dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW81 by performing the sensing operation ZS81 to generate a sensing signal.
Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 receives the sensing signal, obtains a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the sensing signal, and performs a specific checking operation for checking a mathematical relationship between the specific measurement value and the specific measurement value range. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is located based on the specific checking operation, the processing unit 331 specifies the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A by using the storage unit 332. The processing unit 331 decides whether the processing unit 331 is to use the storage unit 332 to change the variable physical parameter range code UN8A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the variable physical parameter QU 1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the sensing unit 334.
On the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by making the second logical decision PB91, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A based on a first code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
When the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the output unit 338 displays a first status indication LB 81. For example, the first state indication LB81 is for indicating a first particular state XJ81 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the particular physical parameter range RD1E 4. On the condition that the particular measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is presently located by making the second logical decision PB91, the processing unit 331 further causes the output unit 338 to change the first state indication LB81 to a second state indication LB82 based on the second code difference DF 81. For example, the second state indication LB82 is used to indicate a second particular state XJ82 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the control signal SC81 is one of an electrical signal SP81 and an optical signal SQ 81. The input unit 337 includes a first input component 3371, a second input component 3372, and a third input component 3373. The first input component 3371 is coupled to the processing unit 331. On condition that the control signal SC81 is the electrical signal SP81, the first input component 3371 causes the processing unit 331 to obtain control information CG81 by receiving the electrical signal SP81 conveying the control information CG 81. For example, the control information CG81 includes the measurement value target range code EM 1T.
The second input component 3372 is coupled to the processing unit 331. Under the condition that the control signal SC81 is the light signal SQ81, the second input component 3372 receives the light signal SQ81 conveying encoded video FY 81. For example, the encoded video FY81 represents the control information CG 81. The third input component 3373 is coupled to the processing unit 331. On condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is arranged within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, the third input element 3373 receives a user input operation BQ81 and causes the processing unit 331 to determine a specific input code UW81 in response to the user input operation BQ 81. For example, the specific input code UW81 is selected from the plurality of different measurement reference range codes EM11, EM12, ….
On the condition that the control signal SC81 is the light signal SQ81, the second input component 3372 senses the encoded image FY81 to determine encoded data DY81, and decodes the encoded data DY81 to provide the control information CG81 to the processing unit 331. On the condition that the specific input code UW81 differs from the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the processing unit 331 causes, by means of the output unit 338, the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, based on a second code difference DX81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A and the specific input code UW81 which is equal to the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A at a constraint condition FR81 to provide the first sensing signal SN81 to the processing unit 331. For example, the constraint condition FR81 is that the variable physical parameter QU1A is equal to a third specific physical parameter QU15 comprised in the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The processing unit 331 estimates the third specific physical parameter QU15 based on the first sense signal SN81 to obtain the first measurement value VN 81.
On the condition that the processing unit 331 recognizes, based on the first and second data comparisons CD81, CD82, that the first measurement value VN81 is an allowable value VG81 outside the measurement value target range RN1T and within the nominal measurement value range RD1N, the processing unit 331 makes the first logical decision PB81 to be positive. Since the variable physical parameter QU1A being in the constraint condition FR81 is outside the physical parameter target range RD1ET and within the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, the processing unit 331 recognizes, based on the first data comparison CD81 and the second data comparison CD82, that the first measurement value VN81 is the allowable value VG81 within the corresponding measurement value range RX 1T.
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the sensor sensitivity YW81 associated with the sensing signal generation HF81 and is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU 11. The sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing the sensor sensitivity YW81 and a sensor measurement range representation GW8R for representing a sensor measurement range RB 8E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RD1E is configured to be identical to the sensor measurement range RB8E or is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RB 8E. The sensor measurement range RB8E is related to the physical parameter sensing performed by the sensing unit 334. The sensor measurement range representation GW8R is provided based on a first preset unit of measurement. For example, the first predetermined measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an english measurement unit.
The nominal measurement value range RD1N and the nominal range threshold pair DD1A are both preset in the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the first data encoding operation ZX 81. The measured value target range RN1T and the target range threshold pair DN1T are both preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the second data encoding operation ZX 82.
The corresponding measured value range RX1T is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the fourth data encoding operation ZX 83. The nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the physical parameter representation GA8T1, the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T and the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY are all provided on the basis of a second preset unit of measure. For example, the second predetermined unit of measurement is one of metric unit of measurement and english unit of measurement, and is the same as or different from the first predetermined unit of measurement. For example, the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY is derived based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E and the physical parameter candidate range representation GA 8T.
The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB 8E. For example, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY, and the physical parameter representation GA8T1 are all of a decimal data type. The first measured value VN81, the second measured value VN82, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A, the target range threshold pair DN1T and the control code CC1T are all of the binary data type and are all suitable for computer processing. The sensor specification FU11 and the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 are both preset.
In some embodiments, before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the input unit 337 receives first write request information WN8T including the preset target range threshold pair DN1T and a first memory address AM 8T. For example, the second memory location YM8T is identified based on the first memory address AM 8T. The first memory address AM8T is preset based on the preset measured value target range code EM 1T. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store the target range threshold pair DN1T of the first write request information WN8T to the first memory location YM8T in response to the first write request information WN 8T.
Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the input unit 337 receives second write request information WC8T including the preset control code CC1T and a second memory address AX 8T. For example, the second memory location YX8T is identified based on the second memory address AX 8T. The second memory address AX8T is preset based on the preset measured value target range code EM 1T. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store the control code CC1T of the second write request information WC8T to the second memory location YX8T in response to the second write request information WC 8T.
Please refer to fig. 1, fig. 2, fig. 3, fig. 4, fig. 5, fig. 6 and fig. 7. A method ML80 for controlling a variable physical parameter QU1A is disclosed. The variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized on the basis of a physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by a measured value target range RN1T and a corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET corresponding to the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The method ML80 comprises the following steps: sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sense signal SN 81; obtaining a first measurement value VN81 in response to the first sense signal SN81 on condition that a control signal SC81 is received which serves to indicate the measurement value target range RN 1T; in response to the control signal SC81, performing a first checking operation BV81 for checking a first mathematical relationship KV81 between the first measured value VN81 and the measured value target range RN 1T; and to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET, on condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, is determined on the basis of the first checking operation BV 81.
In some embodiments, the method ML80 further comprises the steps of: a sensing unit 334 is provided. For example, the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334. The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 related to the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF 81. The first measurement VN81 is obtained in the specified measurement format HH 81.
The measurement target range RN1T has a target range threshold pair DN 1T. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX 1T. The range combination of the measured value target range RN1T and the corresponding measured value range RX1T is equal to the nominal measured value range RD 1N. For example, the measured value target range RN1T, the corresponding measured value range RX1T and the nominal measured value range RD1N are all preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW 81. The nominal measurement value range RD1N has a nominal range threshold pair DD 1A.
The control signal SC81 delivers the target range threshold pair DN1T, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A and a control code CC 1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the target range threshold pair DN 1T.
The step of executing the first checking operation BV81 comprises the following sub-steps: obtaining the target range threshold pair DN1T from the control signal SC 81; and performing the first checking operation BV81 by comparing the first measurement VN81 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN 1T. The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: obtaining the nominal range threshold pair DD1A from the control signal SC 81; and performing a second checking operation BM81 for checking a second mathematical relationship KM81 between the first measured value VN81 and the nominal measured value range RD1N by comparing the first measured value VN81 with the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the step of causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET comprises the sub-steps of: making a first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement VN81 is within the corresponding measurement range RX1T, based on the first check operation BV81 and the second check operation BM 81; on condition that said first logical decision PB81 is positive, determining the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which said variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located; obtaining the control code CC1T from the control signal SC 81; and under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is determined, performing signal generation control GY81 based on the obtained control code CC1T to generate a function signal SG81 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sense signal SN82 after the signal generation control GY81 is executed within an operating time TF 81; obtaining a second measurement value VN82 in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the second sense signal SN82 within a specified time TG82 after the operational time TF 81; and performing an assurance operation GU81 on the condition that the target range RD1ET of the physical parameter, at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, is determined within the specified time TG82 by comparing the second measured value VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T, the assurance operation GU81 being used to cause a physical parameter target range code UN8T representing the determined target range RD1ET of the physical parameter to be recorded.
The variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable length of time LF 8A. For example, the variable time length LF8A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ81 and a reference time length LJ 8T. The time length reference range HJ81 is represented by a time length value reference range GJ 81. The reference time length LJ8T is represented by a time length value CL 8T. The control signal SC81 further conveys the time length value CL 8T. The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: obtaining the time length value CL8T from the control signal SC 81; and checking the obtained numerical relationship KJ81 between the time length value CL8T and the time length value reference range GJ81 to make a second logical decision PE81 for controlling whether a counting operation BC8T of a specific time TJ8T is to be performed or not.
The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: in the condition that the second logical decision PE81 is positive, performing the counting operation BC8T based on the obtained time length value CL 8T; on condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, reaching the specific time TJ8T based on the counting operation BC 8T; and within the specific time TJ8T, performing a signal generating operation BY91 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET.
In some embodiments, the method ML80 further comprises the steps of: providing a sensing unit 334, wherein the step of sensing said variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using said sensing unit 334; and executing a physical parameter control function FA81 associated with said physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The physical parameter control function FA81 is configured to comply with the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 in relation to the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 related to the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF 81. The first measurement VN81 is obtained in the specified measurement format HH 81. For example, the specified measurement format HH81 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY 81.
The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX 1T. The range combination of the target range RD1ET of the physical parameter and the corresponding range RY1ET of the physical parameter is equal to the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 includes the sensor specification FU11, a nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E for representing the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The range combination of the measured value target range RN1T and the corresponding measured value range RX1T is equal to the nominal measured value range RD 1N.
The nominal measurement value range RD1N represents the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 on the basis of the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the first data encoding operation ZX81 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, and has a nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. For example, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A is preset with the specified measurement value format HH 81.
In some embodiments, the measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T and has a target range threshold pair DN 1T. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The target range threshold pair DN1T comprises a first target range threshold DN17 and a second target range threshold DN18 relative to the first target range threshold DN17 and is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and a second data encoding operation ZX82 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA 8T.
The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by supplying the measured value target range code EM1T and is received from the control device 212. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 further comprises a physical parameter representation GA8T 1. The physical parameter representation GA8T1 is used to represent the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The control signal SC81 further conveys the nominal range threshold pair DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the method ML80 further comprises the steps of: providing a storage space SU11, wherein the storage space SU11 has a first memory location YM8T and a second memory location YX8T different from the first memory location YM8T, and both the first memory location YM8T and the second memory location YX8T are identified based on the measured value target range code EM 1T; storing the nominal range threshold pair DD1A in the storage space SU 11; storing the target range threshold pair DN1T in the first memory location YM 8T; storing a control code CC1T in the second memory location YX8T, wherein the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GA8T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX91 for transforming the physical parameter representation GA8T 1; and obtaining the nominal range threshold value pair DD1A from one of the control signal SC81 and the storage space SU11 in response to the control signal SC 81.
The step of executing the first checking operation BV81 comprises the following sub-steps: obtaining the measured value target range code EM1T from the control signal SC81 in response to the control signal SC 81; performing data acquisition AD8A using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T by running a data acquisition program ND8A, wherein the data acquisition AD8A is one of a first data acquisition operation AD81 and a second data acquisition operation AD82, and the data acquisition program ND8A is constructed based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8; and performing the first checking operation BV81 based on a first data comparison CD81 between the first measurement VN81 and the obtained target range threshold pair DN 1T.
The first data acquisition operation AD81 accesses the target range threshold pair DN1T stored in the first memory location YM8T based on the obtained measured value target range code EM1T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN 1T. The second data acquisition operation AD82 obtains the target range threshold value pair DN1T by performing a scientific calculation MZ81 using the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the step of causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET comprises the sub-steps of: based on the first checking operation BV81, making a first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement VN81 is within the corresponding measurement range RX 1T; and on condition that said first logical decision PB81 is positive, determining said corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which said variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.
The step of causing said variable physical parameter QU1A to enter said physical parameter target range RD1ET further comprises the sub-steps of: accessing the control code CC1T stored in the second memory location YX8T on the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, is determined, based on the obtained measured value target range code EM 1T; executing signal generation control GY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 based on the accessed control code CC 1T; and in response to the signal generation control GY81, performing a signal generation operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to generate a function signal SG81, the function signal SG81 being for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the control device 212 is an external device. The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: executing a specified function operation ZH81 associated with the variable physical parameter QU1A, wherein the specified function operation ZH81 is to cause a trigger event EQ81 to occur; and generating the control signal SC81 in response to the trigger event EQ81 by using the control means 212. The nominal measurement value range RD1N is configured to have a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, …. For example, the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, … are represented by a plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …, respectively, and include the measured value target range RN 1T.
The plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, … include the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, and are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 further includes a corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY for representing the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET. The corresponding measured value range RX1T is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and a fourth data encoding operation ZX83 for converting the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8 TY. The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. For example, the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, … include the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the method ML80 further comprises the steps of: the storage space SU11 stores a variable physical parameter range code UN 8A. When the control signal SC81 is received, the variable physical parameter range code UN8A is equal to a specific measurement value range code EM14 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …. For example, the particular measurement value range code EM14 indicates a particular physical parameter range RD1E4 that was previously determined based on the sensing operation ZS 81. The specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. The sensing operation ZS81 performed by the sensing unit 334 is for sensing the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC 81.
The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: based on a second data comparison CD82 between the first measured value VN81 and the obtained pair of nominal range thresholds DD1A, a second checking operation BM81 for checking a second mathematical relationship KM81 between the first measured value VN81 and the nominal measured value range RD1N is carried out. The step of causing said variable physical parameter QU1A to enter said physical parameter target range RD1ET comprises the sub-steps of: the first logic decision PB81 is made based on the first check operation BV81 and the second check operation BM 81. On the condition that the first measured value VN81 is recognized, on the basis of the first data comparison CD81 and the second data comparison CD82, as an allowable value VG81 outside the measured value target range RN1T and within the nominal measured value range RD1N, the first logical decision PB81 is made positive.
In some embodiments, the method ML80 further comprises the steps of: sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sense signal SN82 after the signal generation control GY81 is executed within an operating time TF 81; obtaining a second measurement value VN82 in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the second sense signal SN82 within a specified time TG82 after the operational time TF 81; and checking a third mathematical relationship KV91 between the second measurement VN82 and the measurement target range RN1T by comparing the second measurement VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T to make a second logical decision PB91 of whether the second measurement VN82 is within the measurement target range RN 1T.
The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: on condition that said second logical decision PB91 is positive, determining within said specified time TG82 said physical parameter target range RD1ET within which said variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, and generating a positive operation report RL81, wherein said positive operation report RL81 indicates an operating condition EP81 in which said variable physical parameter QU1A successfully enters said physical parameter target range RD1 ET; and outputting a control response signal SE81 conveying the positive operation report RL81, whereby the control response signal SE81 is used to cause the control device 212 to obtain the positive operation report RL 81.
The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: on the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and that the physical parameter target range RD1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, is determined by making the second logical decision PB91, the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A on the basis of a code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: when the control signal SC81 is received, displaying a first status indication LB81, wherein the first status indication LB81 is for indicating a first specific state XJ81 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the specific physical parameter range RD1E 4; and changing the first state indication LB81 to a second state indication LB82 based on the code difference DF81 on the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and that the physical parameter target range RD1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, is determined by making the second logical decision PB91, wherein the second state indication LB82 is used to indicate a second specific state XJ82 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the method ML80 further comprises the steps of: receiving a first write request message WN8T including the preset target range threshold pair DN1T and a first memory address AM8T before the control signal SC81 is received, wherein the first memory location YM8T is identified based on the first memory address AM8T and the first memory address AM8T is preset based on the preset measured value target range code EM 1T; and storing the target range threshold pair DN1T of the first write request information WN8T to the first memory location YM8T in response to the first write request information WN 8T.
The method ML80 further comprises the steps of: receiving second write request information WC8T including the control code CC1T and a second memory address AX8T that are preset, wherein the second memory location YX8T is identified based on the second memory address AX8T and the second memory address AX8T is preset based on the measured value target range code EM1T, before the control signal SC81 is received; and storing the control code CC1T of the second write request information WC8T to the second memory location YX8T in response to the second write request information WC 8T.
Please refer to fig. 1, fig. 2, fig. 3, fig. 4, fig. 5, fig. 6 and fig. 7. A method ML82 for controlling a variable physical parameter QU1A by generating a function signal SG81 is disclosed. The variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized on the basis of a physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by a measured value target range RN1T and a corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET corresponding to the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The method ML82 comprises the following steps: the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN 81; on condition that a control signal SC81, which serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T, is received by the input unit 337, the processing unit 331 is responsive to the first sense signal SN81 to obtain a first measured value VN 81; the processing unit 331, in response to the control signal SC81, performs a first checking operation BV81 for checking a first mathematical relationship KV81 between the first measured value VN81 and the measured value target range RN 1T; and the processing unit 331 determines, based on the first checking operation BV81, a physical parameter relationship KH81 between the variable physical parameter QU1A and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET to make a reasonable decision PW81 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the functional signal SG81 of the physical parameter target range RD1ET to be generated.
In some embodiments, the method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the control target device 130 provides a sensing unit 334. For example, the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334. The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 related to the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF 81. The first measurement VN81 is obtained by the processing unit 331 in the specified measurement format HH 81.
The measurement target range RN1T has a target range threshold pair DN 1T. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX 1T. The range combination of the measured value target range RN1T and the corresponding measured value range RX1T is equal to the nominal measured value range RD 1N. For example, the measured value target range RN1T, the corresponding measured value range RX1T and the nominal measured value range RD1N are all preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW 81. The nominal measurement value range RD1N has a nominal range threshold pair DD 1A.
The control signal SC81 delivers the target range threshold pair DN1T, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A and a control code CC 1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the target range threshold pair DN 1T.
The step of executing the first checking operation BV81 comprises the following sub-steps: the processing unit 331 obtains the target range threshold pair DN1T from the control signal SC 81; and the processing unit 331 performs the first check operation BV81 by comparing the first measurement VN81 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN 1T. The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the processing unit 331 obtains the nominal range threshold pair DD1A from the control signal SC 81; and the processing unit 331 performs a second checking operation BM81 for checking a second mathematical relationship KM81 between the first measured value VN81 and the nominal measured value range RD1N by comparing the first measured value VN81 with the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the step of determining the physical parameter relationship KH81 to make the sensible decision PW81 comprises the sub-steps of: the processing unit 331 makes a first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement value VN81 is within the corresponding measurement value range RX1T, based on the first check operation BV81 and the second check operation BM 81; and the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter relation KH81 to make the fair decision PW81 based on the first logical decision PB 81. The sub-step of determining the physical parameter relationship KH81 based on the first logical decision PB81 comprises the sub-steps of: on condition that the first logical decision PB81 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 recognizes the physical parameter relationship KH81 as a physical parameter intersection relationship to make the fair decision PW81 to be affirmative.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the processing unit 331 obtains the control code CC1T from the control signal SC 81; and in the condition that the rational decision PW81 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 performs signal generation control GY81 based on the obtained control code CC1T to cause the output unit 338 to generate the function signal SG81 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: after the signal generation control GY81 is executed by the processing unit 331 within the operation time TF81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN 82; the processing unit 331 obtains a second measurement value VN82 in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the second sensing signal SN82 within a specified time TG82 after the operation time TF 81; and on condition that the physical parameter target range RD1ET, within the specified time TG82, at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is presently located, is determined by the processing unit 331 by comparing the second measured value VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T, the processing unit 331 performs an ensuring operation GU81 for causing a physical parameter target range code UN8T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET to be recorded by the storage unit 332.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable length of time LF 8A. For example, the variable time length LF8A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ81 and a reference time length LJ 8T. The time length reference range HJ81 is represented by a time length value reference range GJ 81. The reference time length LJ8T is represented by a time length value CL 8T. The control signal SC81 further conveys the time length value CL 8T. The operation unit 397 further includes a timer 339. The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the processing unit 331 obtains the time length value CL8T from the control signal SC 81; and the processing unit 331 checks the obtained numerical relationship KJ81 between the time length value CL8T and the time length value reference range GJ81 to make a second logical decision PE81 for controlling whether a counting operation BC8T of a specific time TJ8T is to be performed by the timer 339.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: on condition that the second logic decides PE81 to be affirmative, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 339 to perform the counting operation BC8T based on the obtained time length value CL 8T; on condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 reaches the specific time TJ8T based on the counting operation BC 8T; and the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to perform a signal generating operation BY91 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET within the specific time TJ 8T.
In some embodiments, the method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the control target device 130 provides a sensing unit 334, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334; and said operating unit 397 executes a physical parameter control function FA81 associated with said physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The physical parameter control function FA81 is configured to comply with the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 in relation to the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 related to the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF 81. The first measurement VN81 is obtained by the processing unit 331 in the specified measurement format HH 81. For example, the specified measurement format HH81 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY 81. For example, when the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform the sensing signal generation HF81 depending on the sensor sensitivity YW81, the sensing signal generation HF81 being used to generate the first sensing signal SN 81.
In some embodiments, the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX 1T. The range combination of the target range RD1ET of the physical parameter and the corresponding range RY1ET of the physical parameter is equal to the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 includes the sensor specification FU11, a nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E for representing the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The range combination of the measured value target range RN1T and the corresponding measured value range RX1T is equal to the nominal measured value range RD 1N.
The nominal measurement value range RD1N represents the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 on the basis of the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the first data encoding operation ZX81 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, and has a nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. For example, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A is preset with the specified measurement value format HH 81. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T and has a target range threshold pair DN 1T; whereby the measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The target range threshold pair DN1T comprises a first target range threshold DN17 of the measured value target range RN1T and a second target range threshold DN18 relative to the first target range threshold DN17 and is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and a second data encoding operation ZX82 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA 8T. The measured value target range RN1T is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the second data encoding operation ZX 82.
The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by supplying the measured value target range code EM1T and is received from the control device 212. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 further comprises a physical parameter representation GA8T 1. The physical parameter representation GA8T1 is used to represent the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The control signal SC81 further conveys the nominal range threshold pair DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the storage unit 332 provides a storage space SU11, wherein the storage space SU11 has a first memory location YM8T and a second memory location YX8T different from the first memory location YM8T, and both the first memory location YM8T and the second memory location YX8T are identified based on the measured value target range code EM 1T; and the storage unit 332 stores the pair of rated range thresholds DD1A in the storage space SU 11.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the storage unit 332 stores the target range threshold pair DN1T in the first memory location YM 8T; the storage unit 332 stores a control code CC1T in the second memory location YX8T, wherein the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GA8T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX91 for converting the physical parameter representation GA8T 1; and the processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the nominal range threshold value pair DD1A from one of the control signal SC81 and the storage space SU 11. The target range threshold pair DN1T and the control code CC1T are both stored by the storage unit 332 based on the predetermined measured value target range code EM 1T.
The step of executing the first checking operation BV81 comprises the following sub-steps: the processing unit 331 obtains the measured value target range code EM1T from the control signal SC81 in response to the control signal SC 81; the processing unit 331 performs data acquisition AD8A using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T by executing a data acquisition program ND8A, wherein the data acquisition AD8A is one of a first data acquisition operation AD81 and a second data acquisition operation AD82, and the data acquisition program ND8A is constructed based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8; and the processing unit 331 performs the first checking operation BV81 based on a first data comparison CD81 between the first measurement VN81 and the obtained target range threshold pair DN 1T.
The first data acquisition operation AD81 uses the storage unit 332 to access the target range threshold pair DN1T stored in the first memory location YM8T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T. The second data acquisition operation AD82 obtains the target range threshold value pair DN1T by performing a scientific calculation MZ81 using the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the step of determining the physical parameter relationship KH81 to make the sensible decision PW81 comprises the sub-steps of: the processing unit 331 makes a first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement VN81 is within the corresponding measurement range RX1T, based on the first checking operation BV 81; and the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter relation KH81 to make the fair decision PW81 based on the first logical decision PB 81. The sub-step of determining the physical parameter relationship KH81 based on the first logical decision PB81 comprises the sub-steps of: on condition that the first logical decision PB81 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 recognizes the physical parameter relationship KH81 as a physical parameter intersection relationship to make the fair decision PW81 to be affirmative.
For example, on the condition that the first target range threshold DN17 is different from the second target range threshold DN18 and the first measurement value VN81 is between the first target range threshold DN17 and the second target range threshold DN18, the processing unit 331 makes the first logical decision PB81 to be negative by comparing the first measurement value VN81 with the accessed first measurement range limit data code DN 1A. On the condition that the first target range threshold DN17, the second target range threshold DN18 and the first measured value VN81 are equal, the processing unit 331 makes the first logical decision PB81 negative by comparing the first measured value VN81 with the accessed first measured range limit data code DN 1A.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: in the condition that the rational decision PW81 is positive, the processing unit 331 accesses the control code CC1T stored in the second memory location YX8T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T; the processing unit 331 performs signal generation control GY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to control the output unit 338 based on the accessed control code CC 1T; and the output unit 338 performs a signal generation operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 in response to the signal generation control GY81 to generate the function signal SG81, the function signal SG81 being for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the control device 212 is an external device. The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the processing unit 331 causes the function target 335 to perform a specified function operation ZH81 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output unit 338, wherein the specified function operation ZH81 is for causing a trigger event EQ81 to occur; and generating the control signal SC81 in response to the trigger event EQ81 by using the control means 212. The nominal measurement value range RD1N is configured to have a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ….
For example, the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, … have a total reference range number NT81, represented by a plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …, respectively, and include the measured value target range RN 1T. The total reference range number NT81 is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, … include the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, and are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The control signal SC81 further conveys the total reference range number NT 81.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the processing unit 331 obtains the total reference range number NT81 from one of the control signal SC81 and the storage space SU11 in response to the control signal SC 81. The scientific calculation MZ81 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT 81. For example, the total number of reference ranges is greater than or equal to 2. For example, the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 3; the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 4; the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 5; the total reference range number NT11 ≧ 6; and the total reference range number NT11 ≦ 255.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the function target 335 changes the variable physical parameter QU1A from a first specific physical parameter QU17 to a second specific physical parameter QU18 in response to the function signal SG 81. For example, the first specific physical parameter QU17 is within the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET; and the second specific physical parameter QU18 is within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 further includes a corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY for representing the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET. The corresponding measured value range RX1T is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and a fourth data encoding operation ZX83 for converting the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8 TY.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. For example, the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, … include the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The measured value target range RN1T is a first part of the nominal measured value range RD 1N. The corresponding measurement value range RX1T is a second part of the nominal measurement value range RD1N, is adjacent to the measurement value target range RN1T and is complementary to the measurement value target range RN 1T.
The nominal measurement value range RD1N is equal to the range combination of the measurement value target range RN1T and the corresponding measurement value range RX1T complementary to the measurement value target range RN1T and has the nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. For example, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A contains a nominal range threshold DD11 of the nominal measurement value range RD1N and a nominal range threshold DD12 with respect to the nominal range threshold DD11 and is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 on the basis of the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the first data encoding operation ZX 81.
For example, the measurement value target range code EM1T is configured to be equal to an integer. The nominal range threshold DD12 is greater than the nominal range threshold DD 11. The nominal range threshold DD12 and the nominal range threshold DD11 have a relative value VA11 with respect to the nominal range threshold DD 11. The relative value VA11 is equal to the result of the calculation of the nominal range threshold DD12 minus the nominal range threshold DD 11. For example, the target range threshold pair DN1T is preset based on the rated range threshold DD11, the rated range threshold DD12, the integer, and the ratio of the relative value VA11 to the total reference range number NT 81. The scientific calculation MZ81 uses one of the nominal range threshold DD11, the nominal range threshold DD12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the processing unit 331 performs a second checking operation BM81 for checking a second mathematical relationship KM81 between the first measurement value VN81 and the nominal measurement value range RD1N, based on a second data comparison CD82 between the first measurement value VN81 and the obtained nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. The step of determining said physical parameter relationship KH81 to make said sensible decision PW81 comprises the sub-steps of: the processing unit 331 makes the first logic decision PB81 based on the first check operation BV81 and the second check operation BM 81.
In some embodiments, the method ML82 further comprises the steps of: after the signal generation control GY81 is executed by the processing unit 331 within the operation time TF81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN 82; the processing unit 331 obtains a second measurement value VN82 in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the second sensing signal SN82 within a specified time TG82 after the operation time TF 81; and the processing unit 331 checks the third mathematical relationship KV91 between the second measurement VN82 and the measurement target range RN1T by comparing the second measurement VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T to make a second logical decision PB91 whether the second measurement VN82 is within the measurement target range RN 1T.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: on condition that the second logical decision PB91 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 determines within the specified time TG82 the physical parameter target range RD1ET that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within, and generates an affirmative operation report RL81, wherein the affirmative operation report RL81 indicates that the variable physical parameter QU1A successfully enters the operation condition EP81 of the physical parameter target range RD1 ET; and the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to output a control response signal SE81 conveying the positive operation report RL81, whereby the control response signal SE81 is used for causing the control device 212 to obtain the positive operation report RL 81.
For example, after the processing unit 331 performs the signal generation control GY81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform a sensing signal generation HF82 depending on the sensor sensitivity YW81, the sensing signal generation HF82 being used to generate the second sensing signal SN 82. The processing unit 331 responds to the control signal SC81 by causing the output unit 338 to generate the control response signal SE 81.
In some embodiments, the method ML82 further comprises the steps of: the storage unit 332 stores a variable physical parameter range code UN8A in the storage space SU 11. When the control signal SC81 is received, the variable physical parameter range code UN8A is equal to a specific measurement value range code EM14 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …. For example, the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 331 based on a sensing operation ZS 81. The specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. The sensing operation ZS81 performed by the sensing unit 334 is for sensing the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC 81.
For example, the processing unit 331 obtains the specific measurement value range code EM14 before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC 81. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the particular physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the sensing operation ZS81 before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 assigns the obtained particular measurement value range code EM14 to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A by using the storage unit 332. The specific measurement value range code EM14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the specific physical parameter range RD1E 4. The particular measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW 81. For example, the sensing unit 334 performs sensing signal generation dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW81 by performing the sensing operation ZS81 to generate a sensing signal.
Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 receives the sensing signal, obtains a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the sensing signal, and performs a specific checking operation for checking a mathematical relationship between the specific measurement value and the specific measurement value range. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is located based on the specific checking operation, the processing unit 331 specifies the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A by using the storage unit 332. The processing unit 331 decides whether the processing unit 331 is to use the storage unit 332 to change the variable physical parameter range code UN8A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the variable physical parameter QU 1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the sensing unit 334.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: on the condition that the specific measured value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and that the physical parameter target range RD1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, is determined by the processing unit 331 by making the second logical decision PB91, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measured value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A, based on a first code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measured value range code EM14 and the obtained measured value target range code EM 1T.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: when the control signal SC81 is received by the input unit 337, the output unit 338 displays a first state indication LB81, wherein the first state indication LB81 is for indicating a first specific state XJ81 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is arranged within the specific physical parameter range RD1E 4; and on the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and that the physical parameter target range RD1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, is determined by the processing unit 331 by making the second logical decision PB91, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to change the first state indication LB81 to a second state indication LB82 based on the first code difference DF 81. For example, the second state indication LB82 is used to indicate a second particular state XJ82 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the control signal SC81 is one of an electrical signal SP81 and an optical signal SQ 81. The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: on condition that the control signal SC81 is the electrical signal SP81, the processing unit 331 obtains the control information CG81 from the electrical signal SP81 conveying control information CG81, wherein the control information CG81 includes the measurement value target range code EM 1T; and on condition that the control signal SC81 is the light signal SQ81, the input unit 337 determines encoded data DY81 by sensing the encoded picture FY81 conveyed by the light signal SQ81, and decodes the encoded data DY81 to cause the processing unit 331 to obtain the control information CG 81. For example, the encoded video FY81 represents the control information CG 81.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: on condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is arranged within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, the input unit 337 receives a user input operation BQ 81; the processing unit 331 determines a specific input code UW81 in response to the user input operation BQ81, wherein the specific input code UW81 is selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …; and on condition that the specific input code UW81 differs from the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the processing unit 331 causes, by means of the output unit 338, the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, based on a second code difference DX81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A and the specific input code UW81 which is equal to the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
In some embodiments, the step of sensing said variable physical parameter QU1A comprises the sub-steps of: the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A in a constrained condition FR81 to generate the first sensing signal SN 81. For example, the constraint condition FR81 is that the variable physical parameter QU1A is equal to a third specific physical parameter QU15 comprised in the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The step of obtaining the first measurement value VN81 in response to the first sense signal SN81 comprises the sub-steps of: the processing unit 331 estimates the third specific physical parameter QU15 based on the first sense signal SN81 to obtain the first measurement value VN 81.
On condition that the first measurement value VN81 is recognized, based on the first and second data comparisons CD81, CD82, as an allowable value VG81 outside the measurement value target range RN1T and within the nominal measurement value range RD1N, the first logical decision PB81 is made positive by the processing unit 331. Since the variable physical parameter QU1A being in the constraint condition FR81 is outside the physical parameter target range RD1ET and within the nominal physical parameter range RD1E, the processing unit 331 recognizes, based on the first data comparison CD81 and the second data comparison CD82, that the first measurement value VN81 is the allowable value VG81 within the corresponding measurement value range RX 1T.
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the sensor sensitivity YW81 associated with the sensing signal generation HF81 and is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU 11. The sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing the sensor sensitivity YW81 and a sensor measurement range representation GW8R for representing a sensor measurement range RB 8E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RD1E is configured to be identical to the sensor measurement range RB8E or is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RB 8E. The sensor measurement range RB8E is related to the physical parameter sensing performed by the sensing unit 334. The sensor measurement range representation GW8R is provided based on a first preset unit of measurement. For example, the first predetermined measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an english measurement unit.
The nominal measurement value range RD1N and the nominal range threshold pair DD1A are both preset in the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the first data encoding operation ZX 81. The measured value target range RN1T and the target range threshold pair DN1T are both preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the second data encoding operation ZX 82.
The corresponding measured value range RX1T is preset with the specified measured value format HH81 based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the fourth data encoding operation ZX 83. The nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the physical parameter representation GA8T1, the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T and the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY are all provided on the basis of a second preset unit of measure. For example, the second predetermined unit of measurement is one of metric unit of measurement and english unit of measurement, and is the same as or different from the first predetermined unit of measurement. For example, the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY is derived based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E and the physical parameter candidate range representation GA 8T.
The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB 8E. For example, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the corresponding physical parameter range representation GA8TY, and the physical parameter representation GA8T1 are all of a decimal data type. The first measured value VN81, the second measured value VN82, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A, the target range threshold pair DN1T and the control code CC1T are all of the binary data type and are all suitable for computer processing. The sensor specification FU11 and the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 are both preset.
In some embodiments, the method ML82 further comprises the steps of: before the control signal SC81 is received by the input unit 337, the input unit 337 receives first write request information WN8T including the preset target range threshold pair DN1T and a first memory address AM8T, wherein the first memory location YM8T is identified based on the first memory address AM8T and the first memory address AM8T is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code EM 1T; and the processing unit 331, in response to the first write request information WN8T, uses the storing unit 332 to store the target range threshold pair DN1T of the first write request information WN8T to the first memory location YM 8T.
The method ML82 further comprises the steps of: before the control signal SC81 is received by the input unit 337, the input unit 337 receives a second write request information WC8T including the control code CC1T and a second memory address AX8T that are preset, wherein the second memory location YX8T is identified based on the second memory address AX8T and the second memory address AX8T is preset based on the measured value target range code EM1T that is preset; and said processing unit 331 is responsive to said second write request information WC8T to use said storage unit 332 to store said control code CC1T of said second write request information WC8T in said second memory location YX 8T.
Please refer to fig. 8 and 9. Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9017 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9018 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 8 and 9, each of the implementation structure 9017 and the implementation structure 9018 includes the control device 212 and the control-target device 130. The control target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and the storage unit 332. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, and the output unit 338. The input unit 337 includes the first input component 3371, the second input component 3372, and the third input component 3373. The output unit 338 includes an output component 3381, an output component 3382, and an output component 3383. The sensing unit 334, the functional target 335, the storage unit 332, the first input element 3371, the second input element 3372, the third input element 3373, the output element 3381, the output element 3382 and the output element 3383 are all coupled to the processing unit 331 and are all controlled by the processing unit 331.
In some embodiments, the output component 3381 is further coupled to the functional target 335. The processing unit 331 performs the signal generation control GY81 based on the obtained control code CC1T within the operation time TF 81. The output component 3381 performs the signal generation operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 in response to the signal generation control GY81 to generate the function signal SG81 within the operation time TF 81. For example, the function signal SG81 is a control signal. The output component 3381 transmits the function signal SG81 to the function target 335. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG81 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, the function signal SG81 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal, a driving signal and a command signal.
On condition that the processing unit 331 checks the third mathematical relationship KV91 to determine the physical parameter target range RD1ET, at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 determines the positive operation report RL81 and causes the output unit 338 to generate the control response signal SE81 conveying the positive operation report RL 81. The control response signal SE81 is one of the electric signal LP81 and the optical signal LQ 81. The output component 3382 is a transmitter. The output component 3383 is a light emitting component. For example, the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the physical parameter target range RD1ET by checking the third mathematical relationship KV91, and thereby identifies that the physical parameter relationship between the variable physical parameter QU1A and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is the physical parameter intersection relationship that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
On condition that the output component 3382 is configured to generate the control response signal SE81, the processing unit 331 causes, based on the determined positive operation report RL81, the output component 3382 to transmit the electrical signal LP81 conveying the positive operation report RL81 to the control device 212. On condition that the output element 3383 is configured to generate the control response signal SE81, the processing unit 331 causes, based on the determined positive operation report RL81, the output element 3383 to generate the light signal LQ81 conveying the positive operation report RL81, whereby the control device 212 receives the generated light signal LQ81 from the output element 3383. For example, the light emitting assembly is a display assembly. The light signal LQ81 delivers an encoded picture FZ81 representative of the positive operation report RL 81. For example, the encoded image FZ81 is a barcode image.
For example, the control device 212 is identified by a control device identifier HA 0T. The control signal SC81 further conveys the control device identifier HA 0T. The processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the control device identifier HA0T from the control signal SC81 and to cause the output component 3382 to transmit the electric signal LP81 conveying the positive operation report RL81 to the control device 212 based on the obtained control device identifier HA0T and the determined positive operation report RL 81.
In some embodiments, the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81 from the control device 212, either wired or wirelessly. The control signal SC81 is one of the electrical signal SP81 and the optical signal SQ 81. The first input component 3371 is a receiver and receives the electrical signal SP81 from the control device 212 on condition that the control signal SC81 is the electrical signal SP 81. The second input module 3372 is a reader and receives the light signal SQ81 carrying the encoded video FY81 from the control apparatus 212 on the condition that the control signal SC81 is the light signal SQ 81. For example, the encoded image FY81 is a barcode image.
The functional object 335 has the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The input unit 337 further includes an input component 3374. The input component 3374 is coupled to the processing unit 331, is controlled by the processing unit 331 and receives a physical parameter signal SB81 from the control device 212 on condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is to be provided by means of the control device 212. The functional target 335 receives the physical parameter signal SB81 from the input component 3374. The processing unit 331 causes, via the output component 3381, the functional object 335 to use the physical parameter signal SB81 to form the variable physical parameter QU1A dependent on the physical parameter signal SB 81. For example, the input component 3374 is a receiving component. The control device 212 transmits the physical parameter signal SB81 to the input component 3374 by wire or wirelessly.
The physical parameter target range RD1ET has a preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and a preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 relative to the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T 1. The target range threshold pair DN1T includes the first target range threshold DN17 and the second target range threshold DN 18. The preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 is represented by the first target range threshold DN 17. The preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 is represented by the second target range threshold DN 18.
In some embodiments, the triggering event EQ81 is a state change event. The control device 212 includes an operation unit 297 and a state change detector 475 coupled to the operation unit 297. For example, the state change detector 475 is one of a limit detector and an edge detector. The limit detector is a limit switch. The status change detector 475 is configured to detect that a characteristic physical parameter associated with a predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL81 reaches ZL 82. The functional object 335 contains a physical parameter application area AJ 11. The physical parameter application area AJ11 has variable physical parameters QG 1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A depends on the variable physical parameter QU1A and is characterized on the basis of the preset characteristic physical parameter UL 81. For example, the physical parameter application area AJ11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area. The predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL81 is related to the variable physical parameter QU 1A.
Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 causes the function target 335 to perform the specified function operation ZH81 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output unit 338. The specified function operation ZH81 is used to control the variable physical parameter QG1A and cause the trigger event EQ81 to occur by changing the variable physical parameter QG 1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A is configured to be in a variable physical state XA 8A. For example, the operation unit 397 is controlled by the control device 212 to cause the function target 335 to perform the specified function operation ZH 81.
On condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the specific physical parameter range RD1E4, the specified function operation ZH81 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the preset feature physical parameter UL81 to form the feature physical parameter reach ZL82, and changes the variable physical state XA8A from a non-feature physical parameter reach state XA81 to an actual feature physical parameter reach state XA82 by forming the feature physical parameter reach ZL 82. The state change detector 475 generates a trigger signal SX81 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL 82. For example, the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA82 is characterized based on the preset characteristic physical parameter UL 81. The state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX81 in response to a state change event in which the variable physical parameter QG1A is changed from the non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA81 to the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA 82.
For example, the trigger event EQ81 is the state change event where the variable physical parameter QG1A enters the actual characteristic physical parameter to state XA 82. The operation unit 297 receives the trigger signal SX81 and generates the control signal SC81 in response to the received trigger signal SX 81. For example, in the condition that the state change detector 475 is the limit switch, the reaching of the characteristic physical parameter ZL82 is the reaching of the limit position of the variable physical parameter QG1A equal to a variable spatial position to the preset characteristic physical parameter UL81 equal to a preset limit position.
For example, the operation unit 297 obtains a control application code UA8T including at least one of the target range threshold pair DN1T and the measured value target range code EM1T in response to the received trigger signal SX81, and generates the control signal SC81 conveying at least one of the target range threshold pair DN1T and the measured value target range code EM1T based on the control application code UA 8T. For example, the function target 335 forms the variable physical parameter QG1A in the physical parameter application area AJ11 by performing the specified function operation ZH81 caused based on the variable physical parameter QU 1A. Under the condition that the physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the state change detector 475, the state change detector 475 detects that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL 82.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is a first variable electrical parameter, a first variable mechanical parameter, a first variable optical parameter, a first variable temperature, a first variable voltage, a first variable current, a first variable electrical power, a first variable resistance, a first variable capacitance, a first variable inductance, a first variable frequency, a first clock time, a first variable length of time, a first variable brightness, a first variable light intensity, one of a first variable volume, a first variable data flow, a first variable amplitude, a first variable spatial position, a first variable displacement, a first variable ordinal position, a first variable angle, a first variable spatial length, a first variable distance, a first variable translational velocity, a first variable angular velocity, a first variable acceleration, a first variable force, a first variable pressure, and a first variable mechanical power.
The operating unit 397 is configured to execute the physical parameter control function FA81 associated with the variable physical parameter QU1A in dependence on the control signal SC 81. The control-target device 130 is one of a plurality of application devices. The physical parameter control function FA81 is one of a plurality of specific control functions including a light control function, a force control function, an electrical control function, a magnetic control function, and any combination thereof. The plurality of application devices include relays, control switch devices, motors, lighting devices, doors, vending machines, energy converters, load devices, timing devices, toys, appliances, printing devices, display devices, mobile devices, speakers, and any combination thereof.
The function object 335 is one of a plurality of application objects and is configured to perform a particular application function. The specific application function is one of a plurality of physical parameter application functions including an optical use function, a force use function, an electrical use function, a magnetic use function, and any combination thereof. The plurality of application targets include electronic components, actuators, resistors, capacitors, inductors, relays, control switches, transistors, motors, lighting units, energy conversion units, load units, timing units, printing units, display targets, speakers, and any combination thereof. For example, the functional object 335 is a physically implementable functional object.
For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QG1A belong to a physical parameter type TU11 and a physical parameter type TU1G, respectively. The physical parameter type TU11 is the same or different from the physical parameter type TU 1G. The preset characteristic physical parameter UL81 belongs to the physical parameter type TU 1G. The functional object 335 further includes a physical parameter formation area AU11 having the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU 11. For example, the specified function operation ZH81 is used to drive the physical parameter application zone AJ11 to form the characteristic physical parameter to ZL 82. For example, the physical parameter formation area AU11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area. For example, the physical parameter type TU11 is different from the time type.
The variable physical parameter QG1A is one of a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, a variable current, a variable electrical power, a variable resistance, a variable capacitance, a variable inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable time length, a variable brightness, a variable light intensity, a variable volume, a variable data flow, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial position, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, a variable translation speed, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure, and a variable mechanical power. For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A is the same as or different from the variable physical parameter QG 1A.
Please refer to fig. 10, 11 and 12. Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9019 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9020 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 10, 11, and 12, each of the implementation structure 9019, the implementation structure 9020, and the implementation structure 9021 includes the control device 212 and the control-target device 130. The control target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and the storage unit 332. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, and the output unit 338. The input unit 337, the output unit 338, the sensing unit 334, the functional target 335 and the storage unit 332 are all controlled by the processing unit 331.
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN 81. For example, on condition that the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN 81. After the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to generate the function signal SG81 within the operation time TF81 by executing the signal generation control GY81, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the second sensing signal SN 82. For example, the sensing unit 334 is one of a time sensing unit, an electrical parameter sensing unit, a mechanical parameter sensing unit, an optical parameter sensing unit, a temperature sensing unit, a humidity sensing unit, a motion sensing unit, an inertia measurement unit, and a magnetic parameter sensing unit.
The sensing unit 334 includes a sensing element 3341 coupled to the processing unit 331 and uses the sensing element 3341 to generate the first sensing signal SN81 and the second sensing signal SN 82. The sensing component 3341 is of sensor type 7341 and is one of a first plurality of application sensors. The first plurality of application sensors include a first voltage sensor, a first current sensor, a first resistance sensor, a first capacitance sensor, a first inductance sensor, a first accelerometer, a first gyroscope, a first pressure transducer, a first strain gauge, a first timer, a first photodetector, a first temperature sensor, and a first humidity sensor. For example, the sensing component 3341 generates a sensed signal component SN 811. The first sense signal SN81 includes the sense signal component SN 811.
The sensing unit 334 further includes a sensing element 3342 coupled to the processing unit 331 and uses the sensing element 3342 to generate the first sensing signal SN81 and the second sensing signal SN 82. The sensing component 3342 is of sensor type 7342 and is one of a second plurality of application sensors. The sensor type 7342 is different or independent from the sensor type 7341. The second plurality of application sensors includes a second voltage sensor, a second current sensor, a second resistance sensor, a second capacitance sensor, a second inductance sensor, a second accelerometer, a second gyroscope, a second pressure transducer, a second strain gauge, a second timer, a second light detector, a second temperature sensor, and a second humidity sensor.
For example, the sensing component 3342 generates a sensed signal component SN 812. The first sense signal SN81 further includes the sense signal component SN 812. For example, the sensing unit 334 is of the sensor type 734. The sensor type 734 is related to the sensor type 7341 and the sensor type 7342. For example, the sensing unit 334, the sensing component 3341, and the sensing component 3342 are an electric power sensing unit, a voltage sensor, and a current sensor, respectively. For example, the sensing unit 334, the sensing assembly 3341, and the sensing assembly 3342 are an inertial measurement unit, an accelerometer, and a gyroscope, respectively.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A depends on a variable physical parameter JA1A and a variable physical parameter JB1A different from the variable physical parameter JA 1A. For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A, the variable physical parameter JA1A and the variable physical parameter JB1A are respectively a variable electric power, a variable voltage and a variable current, and belong to a first physical parameter type, a second physical parameter type and a third physical parameter type, respectively. The second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type are different or independent. The first physical parameter type is dependent on the second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type. The sensing component 3341 senses the variable physical parameter JA1A to generate the sensed signal component SN 811. The sensing component 3342 senses the variable physical parameter JB1A to generate the sense signal component SN 812.
The processing unit 331 receives the sense signal component SN811 and the sense signal component SN 812. On condition that the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 is responsive to the sense signal component SN811 and the sense signal component SN812 to obtain the first measurement value VN 81. For example, the processing unit 331 obtains a measurement VN811 in response to the sense signal component SN811, obtains a measurement VN812 in response to the sense signal component SN812, and obtains the first measurement VN81 by performing a scientific calculation MY81 using the measurement VN811 and the measurement VN 812. The scientific calculation MY81 is pre-formulated based on the first physical parameter type, the second physical parameter type, and the third physical parameter type.
Each of the variable physical parameter JA1A and the variable physical parameter JB1A is one of a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, a variable current, a variable electrical power, a variable resistance, a variable capacitance, a variable inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable length of time, a variable brightness, a variable light intensity, a variable volume, a variable data flow, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial position, a variable displacement, a variable sequential position, a variable angle, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, a variable translational velocity, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure, and a variable mechanical power.
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU 11. The sensing unit 334 generates the first sensing signal SN81 by performing the sensing signal generation HF81 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW 81. The functional object 335 includes the physical parameter formation area AU11 with the variable physical parameter QU 1A. On condition that the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81 and that the variable physical parameter QU1A is present in the physical parameter formation area AU11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN 81. For example, the sensing unit 334 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11, or is located in the physical parameter formation area AU 11. The processing unit 331 receives the first sense signal SN81 and obtains the first measurement value VN81 in the specified measurement value format HH11 by processing the received first sense signal SN 81.
The processing unit 331 processes the received first sense signal SN81 to obtain a sequence of measurements JN81 comprising the first measurement VN 81. The processing unit 331 performs a checking operation BV85 for checking the mathematical relationship KV85 between the measurement value sequence JN81 and the measurement value target range RN1T by comparing the measurement value sequence JN81 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN 1T. The processing unit 331 performs a checking operation BM85 for checking the mathematical relationship KM85 between the measured value sequence JN81 and the nominal measured value range RD1N by comparing the measured value sequence JN81 with the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DD 1A. The processing unit 331 makes the first logic decision PB81 based on the check operation BV85 and the check operation BM 85. The checking operation BV85 and the checking operation BM85 comprise the first checking operation BV81 and the second checking operation BM81, respectively.
For example, on condition that the processing unit 331 recognizes, based on the first data comparison CD81 and the second data comparison CD82, that the first measurement value VN81 is the allowable value VG81 outside the measurement value target range RN1T and within the nominal measurement value range RD1N, the processing unit 331 makes the first logical decision PB81 to be affirmative. Alternatively, on condition that the processing unit 331 recognizes the first mathematical relationship KV81 as a numerical non-intersection relationship and recognizes the second mathematical relationship KM81 as a numerical intersection relationship KN81, the processing unit 331 makes the first logical decision PB81 to be affirmative. On a negative condition of the first logical decision PB81, the processing unit 331 determines that the physical parameter target range RD1ET is currently being occupied by the variable physical parameter QU1A and causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to remain within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the measured value target range code EM1T from the control signal SC 81. The processing unit 331 performs the verifying operation ZU81 with respect to the variable physical parameter QU1A within the designated time TG82 after the operation time TF 81. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation ZU81, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN 8A. For example, the verification operation ZU81 obtains the second measurement value VN82 in the specified measurement value format HH81 in response to the second sense signal SN82 within the specified time TG82 after the operation time TF 81.
The verification operation ZU81 obtains the target range threshold pair DN1T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and checks the third mathematical relationship KV91 between the second measurement value VN82 and the measurement value target range RN1T by comparing the second measurement value VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T to make the second logical decision PB91 whether the second measurement value VN82 is within the measurement value target range RN 1T. In the condition that the second logical decision PB91 is positive, the verification operation ZU81 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, or determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters.
On the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the processing unit 331 determines, based on the verification operation ZU81, the physical parameter target range RD1ET at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A based on the first code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
In some embodiments, on condition that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located based on the verification operation ZU81 within the specified time TG82, the processing unit 331 performs a data comparison CE8T between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the first code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A and the obtained measured value target range code EM1T, which is equal to the specific measured value range code EM14, based on the data comparison CE8T, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measured value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN 8A.
For example, on condition that the processing unit 331 determines the first code difference DF81 based on the data comparison CE8T, the processing unit 331 executes the ensuring operation GU81, which ensuring operation GU81 is used to cause the physical parameter target range code UN8T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET to be recorded by the storage unit 332. For example, the physical parameter target range code UN8T is equal to the measured value target range code EM1T obtained. The ensuring operation GU81 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measured value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN 8A.
When the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the output component 3383 displays the first status indication LB 81. For example, the first state indication LB81 is used to indicate the first particular state XJ81 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the particular physical parameter range RD1E 4. Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 is configured to obtain the specific measurement value range code EM14 and to cause the output unit 338 to display the first status indication LB81 based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM 14.
On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the first code difference DF81 based on the data comparison CE8T, the processing unit 331 causes the output component 3383 to change the first state indication LB81 to the second state indication LB82 based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T. For example, the second state indication LB82 is used to indicate the second particular state XJ82 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and a corresponding physical parameter range RY1E2 corresponding to the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E is equal to the range combination of the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1E 2. The physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1E2 is different from the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E includes the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET includes the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1E2 includes the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is represented by the measurement value candidate range RN 12. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1E2 is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX 12. The nominal measurement value range RD1N is equal to the range combination of the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the corresponding measurement value range RX 12. For example, the measurement value candidate range RN12 is preset on the basis of the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the nominal measurement value range RD 1N. The corresponding measured value range RX12 is preset on the basis of the nominal measured value range RD1N and the nominal measured value range RD 1N. The nominal measurement value range RD1N is preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GA8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the nominal physical parameter range representation GA 8E.
The measurement candidate range RN12 is different from the measurement target range RN 1T. The corresponding measurement value range RX12 is different from the corresponding measurement value range RX 1T. The nominal measurement value range RD1N comprises the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value candidate range RN 12. The corresponding measurement value range RX12 is adjacent to the measurement value candidate range RN12 and is complementary to the measurement value candidate range RN 12. The corresponding measurement value range RX1T includes the measurement value candidate range RN 12. The corresponding measurement value range RX12 includes the measurement value target range RN 1T. The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, … further include the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, respectively represented by the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, …, respectively represented by a plurality of physical parameter reference range codes.
The measurement value candidate range RN12 is represented by a measurement value candidate range code EM12 and has a candidate range threshold pair DN1B, whereby the measurement value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. For example, the candidate range threshold pair DN1B includes a candidate range threshold DN13 of the measurement value candidate range RN12 and a candidate range threshold DN14 relative to the candidate range threshold DN 13. The measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the candidate range threshold pair DN1B are both preset. The plurality of different measurement reference range codes EM11, EM12, … include the preset measurement candidate range code EM 12. The plurality of different measurement reference ranges RN11, RN12, … further include the measurement candidate range RN12 and are represented by the plurality of different measurement reference range codes EM11, EM12, …, respectively. For example, the plurality of physical parameter reference range codes are configured to be equal to the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …, respectively.
For example, the trigger application function specification GAL8 further comprises a physical parameter candidate range representation GA82 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. The measurement value candidate range RN12 and the candidate range threshold pair DN1B are both preset with the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA82, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81, and a data encoding operation ZX84 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA 82.
In some embodiments, the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 is for indicating the nominal physical parameter range RD1E and the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. The nominal measurement value range RD1N, the nominal range threshold value pair DD1A, the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, …, and the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, … are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The physical parameter control function FA81 is selected from a plurality of different physical parameter control function functions. The storage unit 332 stores the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8.
The processing unit 331 sets in advance the rated range threshold pair DD1A, the target range threshold pair DN1T, and the candidate range threshold pairs DN1B, … according to the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The first sense signal SN81 includes sense data. For example, the sensing data belongs to the binary data type. The processing unit 331 obtains the first measurement value VN81 in the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the sensing data.
In some embodiments, the operating unit 397 is configured to execute the physical parameter control function FA81 in dependence of the control signal SC 81. The processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter relationship KH81 to make the fair decision PW81 based on the first checking operation BV81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 and the second checking operation BM81 for the physical parameter control function FA 81.
In some embodiments, the third input element 3373 comprised in the input unit 337 receives the user input operation BQ81 and provides input data DH81 to the processing unit 331 in response to the user input operation BQ81, on condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC 81. The processing unit 331 performs a data encoding operation EA81 on the input data DH81 to determine the specific input code UW 81. The processing unit 331 performs a check operation ZP81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 in response to determining the particular input code UW81 to decide whether the determined particular input code UW81 is equal to the variable physical parameter range code UN 8A.
For example, on the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the specific input code UW81, the processing unit 331 reads the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the measured value target range code EM1T by using the storage unit 332, and performs the checking operation ZP81 for checking the arithmetic relationship KP81 between the determined specific input code UW81 and the read measured value target range code EM 1T. The checking operation ZP81 is configured to compare the determined specific input code UW81 and the read measured value target range code EM1T by performing a data comparison CE81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to decide whether the determined specific input code UW81 and the read measured value target range code EM1T are different.
On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the second code difference DX81 between the determined specific input code UW81 and the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the obtained measured value target range code EM1T BY performing the data comparison CE81, the processing unit 331 causes the output component 3381 to perform a signal generation operation BY82 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to generate a function signal SG 82. For example, the function signal SG82 is a control signal. The output component 3381 transmits the function signal SG82 to the function target 335. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG82 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, the function signal SG82 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal, a driving signal and a command signal.
For example, on condition that the determined specific input code UW81 is equal to the pre-set measurement value candidate range code EM12 resulting in the second code difference DX81 between the determined specific input code UW81 and the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T, the processing unit 331 determines the second code difference DX81 by performing the data comparison CE81 and, in response to determining the second code difference DX81, causes the output component 3381 to generate the function signal SG 82. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG82 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 contained in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
For example, after the processing unit 331 causes the output component 3381 to perform the signal generating operation BY82, the processing unit 331 performs a verifying operation related to the variable physical parameter QU1A within a specified time. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation, the processing unit 331 specifies the determined specific input code UW81, which is equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12, to the variable physical parameter range code UN 8A.
Please refer to fig. 13 and 14. Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9022 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9023 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 13 and 14, each of the implementation structure 9022 and the implementation structure 9023 includes the control device 212 and the control-target device 130. The control target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and the storage unit 332. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, and the output unit 338.
In some embodiments, the storage unit 332 has the first memory location YM8T and the second memory location YX8T that is different from the first memory location YM8T, stores the target range threshold pair DN1T in the first memory location YM8T, and stores the control code CC1T in the second memory location YX 8T. For example, the first memory location YM8T and the second memory location YX8T are both identified based on the preset measured value target range code EM 1T.
The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 contains the physical parameter representation GA8T1, the physical parameter representation GA8T1 being for representing the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GA8T1 and the third data encoding operation ZX91 for transforming the physical parameter representation GA8T 1. The first memory location YM8T is identified based on the first memory address AM8T, or identified by the first memory address AM 8T. The second memory location YX8T is identified based on the second memory address AX8T or identified by the second memory address AX 8T.
The storage unit 332 further has a memory location YM82 and a memory location YX82 different from the memory location YM82, stores the candidate range threshold pair DN1B at the memory location YM82, and stores a control code CC12 at the memory location YX 82. For example, the memory location YM82 and the memory location YX82 are both identified based on the preset measurement value candidate range code EM 12. The control code CC12 is preset based on the specified physical parameter QD12 within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. The memory location YM82 is identified based on memory address AM82, or by the memory address AM 82. The memory location YX82 is identified based on a memory address AX82, or by the memory address AX 82.
For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 contains a physical parameter representation GA812, the physical parameter representation GA812 being used to represent the specified physical parameters QD12 within the physical parameter target range RD1E 2. The control code CC12 is preset based on the physical parametric representation GA812 and the data encoding operation ZX92 for converting the physical parametric representation GA 812.
In some embodiments, both the target range threshold pair DN1T and the candidate range threshold pair DN1B belong to a measurement range bound data code type TN 81. The measurement range boundary data code type TN81 is identified by a measurement range boundary data code type identifier HN 81. The control code CC1T and the control code CC12 both belong to the control code type TC 81. The control code type TC81 is identified by a control code type identifier HC 81. The measuring range limit data code type identifier HN81 and the control code type identifier HC81 are both preset.
The first memory address AM8T is predetermined on the basis of the predetermined measured value target range code EM1T and the predetermined measuring range limit data code type identifier HN 81. The second memory address AX8T is preset based on the preset measured value target range code EM1T and the preset control code type identifier HC 81. The memory address AM82 is preset on the basis of the preset measured value candidate range code EM12 and the preset measured value limit data code type identifier HN 81. The memory address AX82 is preset based on the preset measured value candidate range code EM12 and the preset control code type identifier HC 81.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 obtains the measured value target range code EM1T from the control signal SC81, obtains the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HN81 in response to the control signal SC81, obtains the first memory address AM8T based on the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HN81, and uses the storage unit 332 to access the target range threshold pair DN1T stored in the first memory location YM8T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T based on the obtained first memory address AM 8T.
The processing unit 331 performs the first check operation BV81 based on the first data comparison CD81 between the first measurement value VN81 and the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T, makes the first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement value VN81 is within the corresponding measurement value range RX1T based on the first check operation BV81, and determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, on the condition that the first logical decision PB81 is positive. For example, on condition that the first logical decision PB81 is positive, the processing unit 331 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently a physical parameter within the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, and thereby recognizes that the physical parameter relationship KH81 between the variable physical parameter QU1A and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is a physical parameter intersection relationship in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET.
The processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the preset control code type identifier HC 81. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 obtains the second memory address AX8T based on the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and the obtained control code type identifier HC81, and uses the storage unit 332 to access the control code CC1T stored in the second memory location YX8T based on the obtained second memory address AX 8T. The processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to perform the signal generating operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to generate the function signal SG81 based on the accessed control code CC1T, the function signal SG81 being used to control the function target 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, one of the first input element 3371 and the second input element 3372 receives the first write request information WN8T comprising the preset target range threshold pair DN1T and the preset first memory address AM8T before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC 81. For example, one of the first input component 3371 and the second input component 3372 receives the first write request information WN8T from the control device 212 in advance. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store the target range threshold pair DN1T of the first write request information WN8T to the first memory location YM8T in response to the first write request information WN 8T.
Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, one of the first input element 3371 and the second input element 3372 receives the second write request information WC8T including the preset control code CC1T and the preset second memory address AX 8T. For example, one of the first input component 3371 and the second input component 3372 previously received the second write request information WC8T from the control device 212. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to store the control code CC1T of the second write request information WC8T to the second memory location YX8T in response to the second write request information WC 8T.
The storage unit 332 further has a memory location YN81, and stores the nominal range threshold pair DD1A at the memory location YN 81. The memory location YN81 is identified based on memory address AN81 or by the memory address AN 81. For example, the memory address AN81 is predetermined. Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, one of the first input element 3371 and the second input element 3372 receives write request information WD81 including the predetermined nominal range threshold pair DD1A and the predetermined memory address AN 81. For example, one of the first input component 3371 and the second input component 3372 receives the write request information WD81 from the control device 212 in advance. The processing unit 331 is responsive to the write request information WD81 to use the storage unit 332 to store the nominal range threshold pair DD1A of the write request information WD81 to the memory location YN 81.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 determines the second code difference DX81 by performing the data comparison CE81 on a condition that the determined specific input code UW81 is equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12 resulting in the second code difference DX81 between the determined specific input code UW81 and the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the second code difference DX81, the processing unit 331 obtains the memory address AX82 based on the determined specific input code UW81 and the obtained control code type identifier HC81 which are equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM 12.
The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to access the control code CC12 stored in the memory location YX82 based on the obtained memory address AX82 and causes the output unit 338 to perform the signal generation operation BY82 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to generate the function signal SG82 based on the accessed control code CC12, the function signal SG82 being used to control the function target 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET.
In some embodiments, after the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to perform the signal generating operation BY82 to generate the function signal SG82 within the operation time TF82, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a sensing signal SN 83. The processing unit 331 obtains a measurement value VN83 in response to the sensing signal SN83 within a specified time TG83 after the operation time TF 82. The processing unit 331 is configured to obtain the memory address AM82 based on the determined specific input code UW81 and the obtained measurement range boundary data code type identifier HN81 equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12, and to use the storage unit 332 to access the candidate range threshold pair DN1B stored in the memory location YM82 based on the obtained memory address AM 82.
On condition that the processing unit 331 checks the mathematical relationship KV83 between the measured value VN83 and the measured value candidate range RN12 by comparing the measured value VN83 and the obtained candidate range threshold value pair DN1B within the specified time TG83 to determine the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to specify the determined specific input code UW81 to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A based on the code difference between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A and the determined specific input code UW81 equal to the preset measured value candidate range code EM 12.
For example, the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 by checking the mathematical relationship KV83, and thereby identifies that the physical parameter relationship between the variable physical parameter QU1A and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is the physical parameter intersection relationship that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2.
Please refer to fig. 15 and fig. 16. Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9024 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9025 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 15 and 16, each of the implementation structure 9024 and the implementation structure 9025 includes the control device 212 and the control-target device 130. The control target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and the storage unit 332. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, the output unit 338, and a timer 339 coupled to the processing unit 331.
In some embodiments, the control signal SC81 received by the input unit 337 conveys the control information CG81, the control information CG81 including the target range threshold pair DN1T, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A, the control code CC1T, and the measured value target range code EM 1T. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines, in response to the control signal SC81, the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to perform the signal generating operation BY81 based on the obtained control code CC1T, the signal generating operation BY81 being used for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
The processing unit 331 obtains the measurement value target range code EM1T and the target range threshold pair DN1T from the received control signal SC 81. On the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET, at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, by comparing the second measurement value VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A based on the first code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
For example, the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter situation in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is present within the physical parameter target range RD1ET by comparing the second measurement value VN82 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T, and thereby recognizes that the physical parameter relationship between the variable physical parameter QU1A and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is a physical parameter intersection relationship in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is present within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the timer 339 is controlled by the processing unit 331, is configured to measure the variable time length LF8A, and is configured to comply with a timer specification FT 11. The variable length of time LF8A is further characterized based on a reference length of time LJ 8T. The control signal SC81 delivers the time length value CL8T representative of the reference time length LJ 8T. For example, the time length value CL8T is preset in a designated count value format HH91 based on the reference time length LJ8T and the timer specification FT 11. The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 contains a time length representation GA8 KJ. The time length representation GA8KJ is used to represent the reference time length LJ 8T. For example, the specified count value format HH91 is characterized based on the specified number of bits UY 91.
For example, the time length value CL8T is preset in the specified count value format HH91 based on the time length representation GA8KJ, the timer specification FT11, and the data encoding operation ZX8KJ for converting the time length representation GA8 KJ. The processing unit 331 obtains the time length value CL8T from the control signal SC81 and checks the numerical relationship KJ81 between the obtained time length value CL8T and the time length value reference range GJ81 to make the second logical decision PE81 for controlling whether the counting operation BC8T of the specific time TJ8T is to be performed.
In some embodiments, the time length value reference range GJ81 used to make the second logical decision PE81 has a time length range threshold pair LN8A and represents the time length reference range HJ 81. The time length value reference range GJ81 is preset with the designated count value format HH91 based on the time length reference range HJ81 and the timer specification FT 11. For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 contains a time length reference range representation GA8HJ, which time length reference range representation GA8HJ is used to represent the time length reference range HJ 81. The time length reference range HJ81 and the time length range threshold pair LN8A are all preset with the specified count value format HH91 based on the time length reference range representation GA8HJ, the timer specification FT11, and the data encoding operation ZX8HJ for converting the time length reference range representation GA8 HJ.
The storage unit 332 stores the time length range threshold pair LN 8A. The processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the time length range threshold pair LN8A from the storage unit 332 and to check the numerical relationship KJ81 to make the second logical decision PE81 by comparing the values contained in the obtained time length value CL8T and the obtained time length range threshold pair LN 8A.
For example, on condition that the processing unit 331 recognizes the numerical relationship KJ81 as a numerical intersection relationship by checking the numerical relationship KJ81, the processing unit 331 makes the second logical decision PE81 to be affirmative. For example, the time length range threshold pair LN8A is preset and contains the time length range threshold LN81 of the time length value reference range GJ81 and the time length range threshold LN82 relative to the time length range threshold LN 81. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the time length reference range HJ81 in which the reference time length LJ8T is included by comparing the obtained time length value CL8T and the obtained time length range threshold pair LN8A, the processing unit 331 makes the second logical decision PE81 to be affirmative.
In some embodiments, on condition that the second logic decides PE81 to be affirmative, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 339 to perform the counting operation BC8T based on the obtained time length value CL 8T. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 reaches the specific time TJ8T based on the counting operation BC8T and causes the output unit 338 to perform a signal generating operation BY91 within the specific time TJ8T, the signal generating operation BY91 being for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET.
For example, on condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 experiences an application time length LT8T with an end time TZ8T to reach the specific time TJ8T based on the counting operation BC 8T. The processing unit 331 obtains the measurement value candidate range code EM12 different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T by performing scientific calculation MK81 using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T within the specific time TJ 8T. For example, the control device 212 determines the time length value CL8T based on the reference time length LJ8T and the timer specification FT11, and outputs the control signal SC81 based on the determined time length value CL 8T. The control information CG81 further includes the time length value CL 8T. The control signal SC81 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to be sufficient within the physical parameter target range RD1ET for the application time length LT8T matching the reference time length LJ 8T.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 retrieves the memory address AX82 based on the retrieved measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the obtained control code type identifier HC 81. The processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to read the control code CC12 stored in the memory location YX82 based on the retrieved memory address AX82, and performs signal generation control GY91 for controlling the output unit 338 based on the read control code CC 12. The output unit 338 performs the signal generation operation BY91 for the physical parameter control function FA81 in response to the signal generation control GY91 to generate a function signal SG91, the function signal SG91 being used to control the function target 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter a physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1 ET. For example, the function signal SG91 is a control signal. The physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, and is different from the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
For example, in the condition that the second logic decides PE81 to be affirmative, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 339 to perform the counting operation BC8T to reach the end time TZ8T based on the obtained time length value CL 8T. When the timer 339 reaches the end time TZ8T by performing the counting operation BC8T, the timer 339 transmits an interrupt request signal UH8T to the processing unit 331 to reach the specific time TJ 8T. The processing unit 331 performs the scientific calculation MK81 using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to retrieve the measurement value candidate range code EM12 different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T in response to the interrupt request signal UH8T within the specific time TJ 8T. For example, the processing unit 331 recognizes the specific time TJ8T by receiving the interrupt request signal UH8T from the timer 339, and thereby experiences the application time length LT 8T. The particular time TJ8T is adjacent to the end time TZ 8T.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range RD 1E. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E contains the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E3, and is represented by the nominal measurement value range RD 1N. For example, the nominal measurement value range RD1N includes the measurement value target range RN1T, the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the measurement value candidate range RN 13. The physical parameter target range RD1ET, the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 are different and represented by the measurement value target range RN1T, the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the measurement value candidate range RN13, respectively.
The physical parameter control function specification GAL8 contains a physical parameter candidate range representation GA83 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 3. The measurement value candidate range RN13 is preset in the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA83, the sensor measurement range representation GW8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the data encoding operation ZX87 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA83, and is represented by the measurement value candidate range code EM13 included in the plural different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ….
The measurement value target range RN1T, the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the measurement value candidate range RN13 are different. The nominal measurement value range RD1N is equal to the range combination of the measurement value target range RN1T and the corresponding measurement value range RX1T, further equal to the range combination of the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the corresponding measurement value range RX12, and further equal to the range combination of the measurement value candidate range RN13 and the corresponding measurement value range RX 13.
In some embodiments, the nominal physical parameter range RD1E of the variable physical parameter QU1A includes the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, … includes the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 3. The variable physical parameter QU1A is in one of a plurality of different reference states based on the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. The plurality of different reference states includes a first reference state, a second reference state and a third reference state, whereby the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized by a variable current state. The variable current state is one of the plurality of different reference states.
For example, the first reference state and the second reference state are complementary. On condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the first reference state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the second reference state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E3, the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the third reference state.
The control code CC1T conveyed by the control signal SC81 and the control code CC1T stored by the storage unit 332 are both preset based on the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to perform the signal generating operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to generate the function signal SG81 based on the obtained control code CC 1T.
The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG81 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from the present state to the first reference state or to the function signal SG81 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from the first specific physical parameter QU17 to the second specific physical parameter QU 18. For example, the present state is one of the second reference state and the third reference state. The first specific physical parameter QU17 is within the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET represented by the corresponding measured value range RX 1T. The second specific physical parameter QU18 is within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, the corresponding measurement value range RX1T includes the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the measurement value candidate range RN 13. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET includes the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 3.
In some embodiments, the plurality of reference states result in the functional object 335 being in a plurality of functional states, respectively. The plurality of functional states are different and include a first functional state, a second functional state, and a third functional state. For example, the first functional state and the second functional state are complementary. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the functional target 335 is in the first functional state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, the functional object 335 is in the second functional state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E3, the functional object 335 is in the third functional state.
The measurement value candidate range RN13 is represented by a measurement value candidate range code EM 13. The measurement value candidate range code EM13 is preset. The plurality of different measurement reference range codes EM11, EM12, … further include the preset measurement candidate range code EM 13. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E is equal to the range combination of the physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1E 3. The corresponding measurement value range RX13 is preset on the basis of the measurement value candidate range RN13 and the nominal measurement value range RD 1N.
For example, the measurement value target range code EM1T is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value target range RN1T is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N on the basis of the measured value target range code EM 1T. The measurement value candidate range code EM12 is a measurement value reference range number. The measurement value candidate range RN12 is arranged in the nominal measurement value range RD1N on the basis of the measurement value candidate range code EM 12.
In some embodiments, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable voltage, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high voltage range and a relatively low voltage range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable current, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high current range and a relatively low current range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable resistance, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high resistance range and a relatively low resistance range, respectively.
On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable luminance, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high luminance range and a relatively low luminance range, respectively. Said relatively high physical parameter range and said relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high light intensity range and a relatively low light intensity range, respectively, under the condition that said variable physical parameter QU1A is said first variable light intensity. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable volume, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high volume range and a relatively low volume range, respectively. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable angular velocity, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high angular velocity range and a relatively low angular velocity range, respectively.
For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range. For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range.
In some embodiments, the function target 335 is a control switch, provided that the control-target device 130 is a relay. In the condition that the function target 335 is the control switch, the control switch has a variable switch state and is in one of an on-state and an off-state based on the variable physical parameter QU 1A. For example, the variable switch state is equal to one of the on state and the off state, and the on state and the off state are complementary. The on state is one of the first functional state and the second functional state, and the off state is the other of the first functional state and the second functional state.
On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 recognizes the variable current state as a specific state different from the first reference state, and thereby generates the function signal SG 81. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG81 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET, whereupon the variable present state is changed to the first reference state. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the second code difference DX81, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 338 to generate the function signal SG 82. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG82 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 contained in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1ET, whereupon the variable present state is changed to the second reference state.
For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable current. The physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are a first current reference range and a second current reference range, respectively. The control code CC1T is preset based on a first specified current within the first current reference range. The control code CC12 is preset based on a second specified current within the second current reference range.
The time length value CL8T is preset in the specified count value format HH91 based on the time length representation GA8KJ, the timer specification FT11, and the data encoding operation ZX8 KJ. On condition that the second logic decides PE81 to be affirmative, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 339 to perform the counting operation BC8T based on the obtained time length value CL 8T. Under the condition that the first variable current is configured to be within the first current reference range due to the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 experiences the application time length LT8T to reach the specific time TJ8T based on the counting operation BC8T, whereby the first variable current is maintained to be within the first current reference range within the application time length LT8T associated with the counting operation BC 8T.
For example, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is a variable rotation speed, the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are a first rotation speed reference range and a second rotation speed reference range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is a variable temperature, the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are a first temperature reference range and a second temperature reference range, respectively.
Please refer to fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9026 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 17, the implementation structure 9026 includes the control device 212, the control-target device 130, and a server 280. The control device 212 is linked to the server 280. The control target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and the storage unit 332. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, the output unit 338, and a timer 340 coupled to the processing unit 331. The timer 340 is controlled by the processing unit 331.
In some embodiments, the input component 3374 comprised in the input unit 337 is coupled to the processing unit 331 and receives the physical parameter signal SB81 from the control device 212 on condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is to be provided by means of the control device 212. The functional target 335 receives the physical parameter signal SB81 from the input component 3374. The processing unit 331 causes the functional object 335 to use the physical parameter signal SB81 to form the variable physical parameter QU1A dependent on the physical parameter signal SB 81.
The control device 212 includes the operation unit 297, a storage unit 250 coupled to the operation unit 297, and a sensing unit 560 coupled to the operation unit 297. The operation unit 297 performs one of a read operation BR81 and a sense operation BZ81 to output the physical parameter signal SB 81. The read operation BR81 reads the physical parameter data record DU81 stored in one of the storage unit 250 and the server 280. The sensing unit 560 senses a variable physical parameter QL1A by performing the sensing operation BZ81 to cause the operation unit 297 to output the physical parameter signal SB 81. For example, the sensing unit 560 is controlled by the operation unit 297 to sense the variable physical parameter QL 1A.
For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A belongs to the physical parameter type TU 11. The variable physical parameter QL1A belongs to the physical parameter type TL 11. The physical parameter type TU11 is the same or different from the physical parameter type TL 11. The control means 212 is in the application environment EX 81. One of the control device 212 and the application environment EX81 has the variable physical parameter QL 1A. The physical parameter data records DU81 are provided in advance on the basis of the variable physical parameters QY 1A. The variable physical parameter QY1A belongs to the physical parameter type TL 11. For example, the physical parameter type TU11 is different from the time type.
In some embodiments, the functional target 335 includes a driver circuit 3355, and a physical parameter forming portion 3351 coupled to the driver circuit 3355. The physical parameter formation part 3351 is used to form the variable physical parameter QU1A and includes the physical parameter formation area AU 11. The driver circuit 3355 is coupled to the input component 3374 and the output component 3381 and is controlled by the processing unit 331 through the output component 3381. The driver circuit 3355 receives the physical parameter signal SB81 from the input element 3374, receives the functional signal SG81 from the output element 3381, and processes the physical parameter signal SB81 in response to the functional signal SG81 to output a drive signal SL 81.
The physical parameter forming part 3351 receives the drive signal SL81 and, in response to the drive signal SL81, brings the variable physical parameter QU1A within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, in case the fair decision PW81 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 causes the output unit 240 to perform the signal generating operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to provide the function signal SG81 to the driving circuit 3355. The driving circuit 3355 drives the physical parameter forming portion 3351 in response to the function signal SG81 to bring the variable physical parameter QU1A into the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the nominal measurement range RD1N is configured to have a plurality of different measurement reference ranges RN11, RN12, …. For example, the plurality of different measurement reference ranges RN11, RN12, … have a total reference range number NT81 and comprise the measurement target range RN 1T. For example, the total reference range number NT81 is preset. The storage unit 332 stores the nominal range threshold pair DD 1A. The processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the total reference range number NT81 from one of the control signal SC81 and the storage unit 332, to obtain the measured value target range code EM1T from the control signal SC81, and to obtain the nominal range threshold pair DD1A from the storage unit 332 in response to the control signal SC 81.
The processing unit 331 performs the scientific calculation MZ81 to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T based on the obtained measured value target range code EM1T, the obtained total reference range number NT81 and the obtained nominal range threshold pair DD1A, and performs the first check operation BV81 by comparing the first measured value VN81 with the obtained target range threshold pair DN 1T. For example, the scientific calculation MZ81 is pre-constructed based on the preset total reference range number NT81 and the preset nominal range threshold value DD 1A.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 generates the control GY81 to cause the timer 340 to perform a counting operation BE81 in response to the signal performed within the operation time TF 81. The processing unit 331 arrives at the designated time TG82 based on the counting operation BE81 and obtains the second measurement value VN82 in response to the second sensing signal SN82 at the designated time TG 82.
The variable physical parameter QL1A is one of a second variable electrical parameter, a second variable mechanical parameter, a second variable optical parameter, a second variable temperature, a second variable voltage, a second variable current, a second variable electrical power, a second variable resistance, a second variable capacitance, a second variable inductance, a second variable frequency, a second clock time, a second variable time length, a second variable brightness, a second variable light intensity, a second variable volume, a second variable data flow, a second variable amplitude, a second variable spatial position, a second variable displacement, a second variable sequential position, a second variable angle, a second variable spatial length, a second variable distance, a second variable translational speed, a second variable angular speed, a second variable acceleration, a second variable force, a second variable pressure, and a second variable mechanical power.
The variable physical parameter QY1A is one of a third variable electrical parameter, a third variable mechanical parameter, a third variable optical parameter, a third variable temperature, a third variable voltage, a third variable current, a third variable electrical power, a third variable resistance, a third variable capacitance, a third variable inductance, a third variable frequency, a third clock time, a third variable time length, a third variable brightness, a third variable light intensity, a third variable volume, a third variable data flow rate, a third variable amplitude, a third variable spatial position, a third variable displacement, a third variable sequence position, a third variable angle, a third variable spatial length, a third variable distance, a third variable translation speed, a third variable angular velocity, a third variable acceleration, a third variable force, a third variable pressure, and a third variable mechanical power.
Please refer to fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9027 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 18, the implementation structure 9027 includes the control device 212, the control-target device 130, and the server 280. The control device 212, the control-target device 130, and the server 280 are all coupled to a network 410. The control device 212 is linked to the server 280 through the network 410. The control target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and the storage unit 332. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, and the output unit 338. The control device 212 transmits the control signal SC81 to the control-target device 130 through the network 410. The control-target device 130 transmits the control response signal SE81 to the control device 212 via the network 410.
In some embodiments, the predetermined measurement value target range code EM1T is a measurement value reference range number. The variable physical parameter range code UN8A stored is a variable physical parameter range number. The control signal SC81 delivers a relative reference range code ZB 81. For example, the relative reference range code ZB81 is a relative reference range number. The processing unit 331 obtains the relative reference range code ZB81 from the control signal SC81 and accesses the variable physical parameter range code UN8A, which is equal to the measured value reference range code EB81, by using the storage unit 332 on condition that the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC 81. The processing unit 331 performs a scientific calculation MU81 based on the obtained relative reference range code ZB81 and the accessed measurement value reference range code EB81 to obtain the preset measurement value target range code EM 1T. For example, the scientific calculation MU81 uses the obtained relative reference range code ZB81 and the accessed measurement value reference range code EB 81. For example, the accessed measurement value reference range code EB81 is equal to the particular measurement value range code EM 14.
For example, the processing unit 331 obtains the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by adding the obtained relative reference range code ZB81 and the accessed measurement value reference range code EB 81. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by delivering the relative reference range code ZB 81. The processing unit 331 performs the data acquisition AD8A using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN 1T. On the condition that the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN8A based on the first code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
In some embodiments, the relative reference range code ZB81 is equal to one of the relative value VK81 and the relative value VK 82. The relative value VK82 is different from the relative value VK 81. For example, the relative value VK81 is proportional to 1, or equal to 1. The relative value VK82 is proportional to (-1), or equal to (-1). In a first particular case, the relative reference horizon code ZB81 is equal to the relative value VK 81. For example, the relative value VK81 is configured to be equal to a positive integer. In a second particular case, the relative reference horizon code ZB81 is equal to the relative value VK 82. For example, the relative value VK82 is configured to be equal to a negative integer.
The physical parameter target range RD1ET has a first specific physical parameter range limit and a second specific physical parameter range limit relative to the first specific physical parameter range limit. In the first particular case, the processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the relative reference range code ZB81 from the control signal SC81 equal to the relative value VK81 and to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a first physical quantity change to change the variable present state of the variable physical parameter QU1A, based on the obtained relative reference range code ZB 81.
For example, in the first particular case, the processing unit 331 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to pass from the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET through the first particular physical parameter range limit to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET based on the obtained relative reference range code ZB 81. The first specific physical parameter range limit is one of the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T 2. For example, in the first specific case, the first physical quantity change is one of a first physical increment and a first physical decrement.
In the second particular case, the processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the relative reference range code ZB81 from the control signal SC81 equal to the relative value VK82 and to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a second physical quantity change opposite to the first physical quantity change to change the variable present state of the variable physical parameter QU1A, based on the obtained relative reference range code ZB 81. For example, in the second particular case, the processing unit 331 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to pass from the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET through the second particular physical parameter range limit to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET based on the obtained relative reference range code ZB 81.
The second specific physical parameter range limit is the other of the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T 2. For example, in the second specific case, the second physical amount change is one of a second physical increment and a second physical decrement. For example, the relative reference horizon code ZB81 in the second particular case is different from the relative reference horizon code ZB81 in the first particular case.
Please refer to fig. 19, fig. 20, fig. 21 and fig. 22. Fig. 19 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9028 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 20 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9029 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 21 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9030 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9031 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 19, 20, 21, and 22, each of the implementation structure 9028, the implementation structure 9029, the implementation structure 9030, and the implementation structure 9031 includes the control device 212 and the control target device 130. The control target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and the storage unit 332. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, the output unit 338, and a timer 342 coupled to the processing unit 331.
In some embodiments, the timer 342 is controlled by the processing unit 331 and is used to measure the clock time TH 1A. The timer 342 is configured to comply with a timer specification FT 21. The variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH 1A. The clock times TH1A are characterized based on a plurality of different time reference intervals HR1E1, HR1E2, …. The plurality of different time reference intervals HR1E1, HR1E2, … are represented by a plurality of time value reference ranges RQ11, RQ12, …, respectively, and are arranged based on a preset time reference interval order QB 81. The complex time value reference ranges RQ11, RQ12, … are arranged based on the preset time reference interval sequence QB 81.
The plural time reference ranges RQ11, RQ12, … are all preset with a specified count value format HH95 based on the timer specification FT21 and are represented by plural time reference range codes EL11, EL12, …, respectively. The storage unit 332 further has a plurality of different memory locations YS81, YS82, …, and stores a plurality of physical parameter designation range codes UQ11, UQ12, … at the plurality of different memory locations YS81, YS82, …, respectively. The plurality of different time reference intervals HR1E1, HR1E2, … are represented by a plurality of time reference interval codes, respectively. For example, the plurality of time reference interval codes are configured to be equal to the plurality of time value reference range codes EL11, EL12, …, respectively. Thus, the plurality of time-value reference range codes EL11, EL12, … are configured to indicate the plurality of different time reference intervals HR1E1, HR1E2, …, respectively. For example, the specified count value format HH95 is characterized based on the specified number of bits UY 95.
The complex time-value reference range codes EL11, EL12, … include a time-value target range code EL1T and a time-value candidate range code EL 12. The plurality of different temporal reference intervals HR1E1, HR1E2, … includes a temporal target interval HR1ET and a temporal candidate interval HR1E 2. The time value target range code EL1T and the time value candidate range code EL12 are configured to indicate the time target interval HR1ET and the time candidate interval HR1E2, respectively. The complex time value reference ranges RQ11, RQ12, … include a time value target range RQ1T and a time value candidate range RQ 12. The time target interval HR1ET and the time candidate interval HR1E2 are represented by the time value target range RQ1T and the time value candidate range RQ12, respectively.
In some embodiments, the plurality of different memory locations YS81, YS82, … are identified based on the plurality of time value reference range codes EL11, EL12, …, respectively. For example, the plurality of different memory locations YS81, YS82, … are identified based on a plurality of memory addresses AS81, AS82, …, respectively, or are identified by the plurality of memory addresses AS81, AS82, …, respectively. The plurality of memory addresses AS81, AS82, … are preset based on the plurality of time-value reference range codes EL11, EL12, …, respectively. For example, the clock time TH1A is further characterized based on the nominal time interval HR 1E. The nominal time interval HR1E comprises the plurality of different time reference intervals HR1E1, HR1E2, … and is represented by a nominal time value range HR 1N. The nominal time value range HR1N contains the plural time value reference ranges RQ11, RQ12, … and is preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the nominal time interval HR1E and the timer specification FT 21.
For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 contains a nominal time interval representation GA8HE and a time reference interval representation GA8 HR. The nominal time interval representation GA8HE is used to represent the nominal time interval HR 1E. The time reference interval representation GA8HR is used to represent the plurality of different time reference intervals HR1E1, HR1E2, …. The nominal time value range HR1N is preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the nominal time interval representation GA8HE, the timer specification FT21 and a data encoding operation ZX8HE for converting the nominal time interval representation GA8 HE. The complex time-value reference ranges RQ11, RQ12, … are preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the time reference interval representation GA8HR, the timer specification FT21, and the data encoding operation ZX8HR for converting the time reference interval representation GA8 HR.
The complex physical parameter designation range codes UQ11, UQ12, … are configured to be stored based on the complex time-value reference range codes EL11, EL12, …, respectively, and include a physical parameter target range code UQ1T and a physical parameter candidate range code UQ 12. The plurality of physical parameter specification range codes UQ11, UQ12, … are all selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, …. The physical parameter target range code UQ1T represents the physical parameter target range RK1ET within which the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time target interval HR1ET, and is configured to be stored in the memory location YS8T based on the time value target range code EL 1T. The memory location YS8T is identified based on memory address AS 8T. The plurality of time value reference range codes EL11, EL12, … are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8.
The physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 represents the physical parameter candidate range RK1E2 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time candidate interval HR1E2, and is configured to be stored in the memory location YS82 based on the time value candidate range code EL 12. The memory location YS82 is identified based on memory address AS 82. The physical parameter target range RK1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RK1E2 are both selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, …. For example, the temporal candidate interval HR1E2 is adjacent to the temporal target interval HR1 ET.
For example, the physical parameter target range RK1ET is identical to the physical parameter target range RD1ET on condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM 1T. The physical parameter candidate range RK1E2 is identical to the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 on the condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ12 is equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM 12. For example, the temporal target interval HR1ET and the temporal candidate interval HR1E2 have a preset time interval therebetween.
In some embodiments, when the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM 1T. The control signal SC81 delivers the preset time value target range code EL 1T. The processing unit 331 obtains the conveyed time value target range code EL1T from the control signal SC81, obtains the memory address AS8T based on the obtained time value target range code EL1T, and accesses the physical parameter target range code UQ1T stored in the memory location YS8T based on the obtained memory address AS8T to obtain the preset measurement value target range code EM 1T.
For example, the control signal SC81 functions to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by delivering the preset time value target range code EL1T on the condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measured value target range code EM 1T. The processing unit 331 performs the data acquisition AD8A using the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN 1T. The processing unit 331 performs the first check operation BV81 based on the first data comparison CD81 between the first measurement VN81 and the obtained target range threshold pair DN1T and makes the first logical decision PB81 whether the first measurement VN81 is within the corresponding measurement range RX1T based on the first check operation BV 81.
On condition that the first logical decision PB81 is affirmative, the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, and executes the signal generation control GY81 for generating the function signal SG 81. The function signal SG81 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the same physical parameter target range RK1ET as the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The processing unit 331 performs the verifying operation ZU81 with respect to the variable physical parameter QU1A within the designated time TG82 after the operation time TF 81. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, based on the verification operation ZU81 within the specified time TG82, the processing unit 331 performs the data comparison CE8T between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T.
On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the first code difference DF81 between the variable physical parameter range code UN8A and the obtained measured value target range code EM1T, which is equal to the specific measured value range code EM14, based on the data comparison CE8T, the processing unit 331 uses the storage unit 332 to assign the obtained measured value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN 8A.
In some embodiments, the timer 342 is configured to represent the time target interval HR1ET by using the time value target range RQ1T, and is configured to represent the time candidate interval HR1E2 by using the time value candidate range RQ 12. The control signal SC81 further delivers a clock reference time value NR81 representative of the clock reference time TR 81. For example, the clock reference time TR81 is close to the present time. For example, the time difference between the clock reference time TR81 and the current time is within a preset time length. The clock reference time value NR81 is preset in the specified count value format HH95 based on the clock reference time TR81 and the timer specification FT 21.
The control information CG81 includes the time value target range code EL1T and the clock reference time value NR 81. For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 contains a clock time representation GA8 TR. The clock time representation GA8TR is used to represent the clock reference time TR 81. The clock reference time value NR81 is preset in the specified count value format HH95 based on the clock time representation GA8TR, the timer specification FT21, and a data encoding operation ZX8TR for converting the clock time representation GA8 TR.
The processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the clock reference time value NR81 from the control signal SC 81. For example, the operation unit 297 included in the control device 212 is configured to obtain the preset time-value target range code EL1T and the preset clock-reference time value NR81, and output the control signal SC81 that conveys the control information CG81 based on the obtained clock-reference time value NR81 and the obtained time-value target range code EL 1T.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 causes the timer 342 to start within a start time TT82 based on the obtained clock reference time value NR81, and thereby causes the timer 342 to generate a clock time signal SY80 within the start time TT 82. The clock time signal SY80 is an initial time signal and delivers an initial count value NY80 in the specified count value format HH 95. For example, the initial count value NY80 is equal to the clock reference time value NR 81.
For example, the timer 342 is configured to have a variable count value NY 8A. On condition that the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81 conveying the clock reference time value NR81 from the control device 212, the processing unit 331 starts the timer 342 based on the obtained clock reference time value NR81 to perform a counting operation BD81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to change the variable count value NY 8A. The variable count value NY8A is configured to be equal to the initial count value NY80 within the start time TT82, and is provided in the designated count value format HH 95. For example, the initial count value NY80 is configured to be the same as the obtained clock reference time value NR 81.
On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the control signal SC81, the processing unit 331 comes to a specified time TY81 based on the counting operation BD 81. Within the specified time TY81, the timer 342 senses the clock time TH1A to cause the variable count value NY8A to be equal to a specific count value NY81, and thereby generates a clock time signal SY81 delivering the specific count value NY 81.
The processing unit 331 obtains the specific count value NY81 in the specific count value format HH95 from the clock time signal SY81 within the specified time TY81, and obtains the time value candidate range code EL12 by performing scientific calculation MK85 using the obtained time value target range code EL1T within the specified time TY81 so as to check the mathematical relationship KQ81 between the obtained specific count value NY81 and the time value candidate range RQ 12.
In some embodiments, the time value target range RQ1T has a target range threshold pair DQ 1T. The target range threshold pair DQ1T includes a target range threshold DQ17 of the time value target range RQ1T and a target range threshold DQ18 relative to the target range threshold DQ 17. The time value target range RQ1T and the target range threshold pair DQ1T are both preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the time target interval HR1ET and the timer specification FT 21. The time value candidate range RQ12 has candidate range threshold pairs DQ 1B. The candidate range threshold pair DQ1B includes a candidate range threshold DQ13 of the time value candidate range RQ12 and a candidate range threshold DQ14 relative to the candidate range threshold DQ 13. The time value candidate range RQ12 and the candidate range threshold pair DQ1B are both preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the time candidate interval HR1E2 and the timer specification FT 21.
For example, the physical parameter control function specification GAL8 includes a time candidate interval representation GA8HT and a time candidate interval representation GA8H 2. The time candidate interval representation GA8HT is used to represent the time target interval HR1 ET. The time candidate interval representation GA8H2 is used to represent the time candidate interval HR1E 2. The time value target range RQ1T and the target range threshold pair DQ1T are all preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the time candidate interval representation GA8HT, the timer specification FT21, and a data encoding operation ZX8HT for converting the time candidate interval representation GA8 HT. The time value candidate range RQ12 and the candidate range threshold pair DQ1B are both preset based on the time candidate interval representation GA8H2, the timer specification FT21, and the data encoding operation ZX8H2 used to transform the time candidate interval representation GA8H 2.
For example, within the specified time TY81, the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 is equal to the measurement value candidate range code EM12 that is preset. The storage unit 332 stores the target range threshold pair DQ1T and the candidate range threshold pair DQ 1B. The target range threshold pair DQ1T and the candidate range threshold pair DQ1B are stored in the storage unit 332 based on the time value target range code EL1T and the time value candidate range code EL12, respectively.
The processing unit 331 is configured to obtain the candidate range threshold pair DQ1B from the storing unit 332 based on the obtained time value candidate range code EL12 within the specified time TY81, and perform a checking operation ZQ81 for checking the mathematical relationship KQ81 between the specific count value NY81 and the time value candidate range RQ12 by comparing the obtained specific count value NY81 with the obtained candidate range threshold pair DQ 1B. On the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the time candidate interval HR1E2 at which the clock time TH1A is currently located based on the checking operation ZQ81 within the specified time TY81, the processing unit 331 obtains the memory address AS82 based on the obtained time-value candidate range code EL12, and accesses the physical-parameter candidate range code UQ12 stored in the memory location YS82 based on the obtained memory address AS82 within the specified time TY81 to obtain the physical-parameter candidate range code UQ 12.
For example, the processing unit 331 determines, based on the checking operation ZQ81, a time instance in which the clock time TH1A is currently within the time candidate interval HR1E2, and thereby recognizes that the time relationship between the clock time TH1A and the time candidate interval HR1E2 is a time intersection relationship in which the clock time TH1A is currently within the time candidate interval HR1E 2. On condition that the processing unit 331 obtains the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 from the memory location YS82, the processing unit 331 performs a check operation ZP85 for the physical parameter control function FA81 within the specified time TY81 to decide whether the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 is equal to the variable physical parameter range code UN 8A.
In some embodiments, on the condition that the processing unit 331 obtains the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 from the memory location YS82, the processing unit 331 reads the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the measured value target range code EM1T by using the storage unit 332, and performs the checking operation ZP85 for checking the arithmetic relationship KP85 between the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the read measured value target range code EM 1T. The checking operation ZP85 is configured to compare the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the read measured value target range code EM1T by performing a data comparison CE85 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to decide whether the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the read measured value target range code EM1T are different.
On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the code difference DX85 between the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the variable physical parameter range code UN8A equal to the obtained measured value target range code EM1T BY performing the data comparison CE85, the processing unit 331 causes the output component 3381 to perform the signal generating operation BY85 for the physical parameter control function FA81 within the specified time TY81 to generate the function signal SG 85. For example, the function signal SG85 is a control signal. The output component 3381 transmits the function signal SG85 to the function target 335. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG85 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, on condition that the processing unit 331 obtains the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 equal to the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12 from the memory location YS12, the function target 335 responds to the function signal SG85 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter candidate range RK1E2 identical to the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2.
In some embodiments, the control device 212 includes the operation unit 297 and the state change detector 475 coupled to the operation unit 297. The complex physical parameter specification range codes UQ11, UQ12, … belong to a physical parameter specification range code type TS 81. The physical parameter specifying range code type TS81 is identified by a physical parameter specifying range code type identifier HS 81. The physical parameter designation range code type identifier HS81 is preset. The memory address AS8T is preset based on the preset physical parameter specification range code type identifier HS81 and the preset time value target range code EL 1T. The memory address AS82 is preset based on the preset physical parameter specification range code type identifier HS81 and the preset time value candidate range code EL 12.
Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the operation unit 297 is configured to retrieve the preset physical parameter target range code UQ1T, the preset physical parameter specifying range code type identifier HS81 and the preset time value target range code EL1T, and to retrieve the memory address AS8T in advance based on the retrieved physical parameter specifying range code type identifier HS81 and the retrieved time value target range code EL 1T. The operation unit 297 provides the write request information WS8T to the input unit 337 based on the retrieved physical parameter target range code UQ1T and the retrieved memory address AS 8T. The write request information WS8T includes the retrieved physical parameter target range code UQ1T and the retrieved memory address AS 8T.
For example, before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the input unit 337 receives the write request information WS8T from the operation unit 297. The processing unit 331 obtains the included physical parameter target range code UQ1T and the included memory address AS8T from the received write request information WS8T, and uses the storing unit 332 to store the obtained physical parameter target range code UQ1T at the memory location YS8T based on the obtained physical parameter target range code UQ1T and the obtained memory address AS 8T.
Before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the operation unit 297 is configured to retrieve the physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the preset time value candidate range code EL12, and to retrieve the memory address AS82 in advance based on the retrieved physical parameter specifying range code type identifier HS81 and the retrieved time value candidate range code EL 12. The processing unit 331 provides write request information WS82 to the input unit 337 based on the retrieved physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the retrieved memory address AS 82. The write request information WS82 includes the retrieved physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the retrieved memory address AS 82.
For example, before the input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81, the input unit 337 receives the write request information WS82 from the operation unit 297. The processing unit 331 obtains the included physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the included memory address AS82 from the received write request information WS82, and uses the storage unit 332 to store the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 at the memory location YS82 based on the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UQ12 and the obtained memory address AS 82.
Please refer to fig. 23, 24 and 25. Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9032 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 24 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9032 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 25 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9034 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 23, 24, and 25, each of the implementation structure 9032, the implementation structure 9033, and the implementation structure 9034 includes the control device 212 and the control-target device 130. The control device 212 comprises the operation unit 297 and the state change detector 475. The control-target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the storage unit 332, the sensing unit 334, the function target 335, and a function target 735. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the input unit 337, and the output unit 338.
In some embodiments, the control-target device 130 further includes a function target 735 coupled to the operation unit 397 and a multiplexer 363 coupled to the operation unit 397. The function target 735 is coupled to the output unit 338 and includes a physical parameter formation area AU 21. The physical parameter formation area AU21 has variable physical parameters QU 2A. The multiplexer 363 has an input 3631, an input 3632, a control 363C and an output 363P. The control terminal 363C is coupled to the processing unit 331. For example, the functional object 735 is a physically realizable functional object and has a functional structure similar to the functional object 335.
The input 3631 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU 11. The input 3632 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU 21. The output 363P is coupled to the sensing unit 334. For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QU2A are a fourth variable electrical parameter and a fifth variable electrical parameter, respectively. For example, the fourth and fifth variable electrical parameters are a fourth and fifth variable voltage, respectively. The input end 3631 and the output end 363P have a first functional relationship. The first functional relationship is equal to one of a first on relationship and a first off relationship.
A second functional relationship exists between the input 3632 and the output 363P. The second functional relationship is equal to one of a second on relationship and a second off relationship. On the condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first on-state relationship, the sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output 363P and the input 3631, and is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11 through the output 363P and the input 3631. On the condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second on-state relationship, the sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU2A through the output 363P and the input 3632, and is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU21 through the output 363P and the input 3632. For example, the multiplexer 263 is controlled by the processing unit 331 and is an analog multiplexer.
For example, the storage unit 332, the sensing unit 334, the multiplexer 263, the functional target 335, and the functional target 735 are all coupled to the operation unit 397 and are all controlled by the processing unit 331. The control device 212 and the control-target device 130 are separate or in contact. The operating unit 397 and the functional object 335 are separate or in contact. The operating unit 397 and the functional target 735 are separate or in contact. The operation unit 397 and the sensing unit 334 are separated or in contact. Said control means 212 are intended to control said variable physical parameter QU 2A.
In some embodiments, the functional object 335 is identified by a functional object identifier HA 2T. The functional object 735 is identified by a functional object identifier HA 22. The functional object 335 and the functional object 735 are respectively located at different spatial locations and are both coupled to the processing unit 331 through the output unit 338. The functional object identifier HA2T and the functional object identifier HA22 are both preset based on the physical parameter control function specification GAL 8. The control signal SC81 further conveys at least one of the functional target identifier HA2T and the functional target identifier HA 22.
The input unit 337 receives the control signal SC81 from the operation unit 297. On condition that the control signal SC81 delivers the functional target identifier HA2T, the processing unit 331 selects the functional target 335 for control in response to the control signal SC 81. On condition that the control signal SC81 delivers the functional target identifier HA22, the processing unit 331 selects the functional target 735 to control in response to the control signal SC 81. For example, the functional destination identifier HA2T is a first functional destination number. The function target identifier HA22 is a second function target number.
For example, the functional object 335 and the functional object 735 are separate or separated by a layer of material 70U disposed between the functional object 335 and the functional object 735. The functional target 335, the material layer 70U, and the functional target 735 are all coupled to a support medium 70M. The control-target device 130 includes the material layer 70U, or the material layer 70U is disposed outside the control-target device 130. The control-target device 130 includes the supporting medium 70M, or the supporting medium 70M is disposed outside the control-target device 130. For example, the support medium 70M is coupled to the operation unit 397.
In some embodiments, on condition that the control signal SC81 delivers the functional target identifier HA2T, the processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the functional target identifier HA2T from the control signal SC81 and to cause the sensing unit 334 to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T and thereby receive the first sensing signal SN81 from the sensing unit 334. The processing unit 331 obtains the first measurement value VN81 in the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the received first sensing signal SN81, and transmits at least one of the function signal SG81, the function signal SG82, and the function signal SG91 to the function target 335 based on the obtained function target identifier HA 2T.
For example, the processing unit 331 provides a control signal SD81 to the control terminal 363C based on the obtained functional object identifier HA 2T. For example, the control signal SD81 is a selection control signal and functions to instruct the input 3631. The multiplexer 363 is responsive to the control signal SD81 to cause the first functional relationship between the input 3631 and the output 363P to be equal to the first conductive relationship. Under the condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first conductive relationship, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN81, so the processing unit 331 receives the first sensing signal SN81 from the sensing unit 334.
The storage unit 332 has the storage space SU 11. The storage unit 332 further stores the nominal range threshold pair DD1A, the variable physical parameter range code UN8A, the target range threshold pair DN1T, the control code CC1T, the candidate range threshold pair DN1B, the control code CC12, and the time length range threshold pair LN8A in the storage space SU11 based on the preset functional target identifier HA 2T. The processing unit 331 further uses the storage unit 332 to access any one of the nominal range threshold pair DD1A, the variable physical parameter range code UN8A, the target range threshold pair DN1T, the control code CC1T, the candidate range threshold pair DN1B, the control code CC12 and the time length range threshold pair LN8A based on the obtained functional target identifier HA 2T.
In some embodiments, the first memory address AM8T is predetermined based on the predetermined function object identifier HA2T, the predetermined measurement value object range code EM1T and the predetermined measurement range limit data code type identifier HN 81. The processing unit 331 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to use the obtained functional target identifier HA2T, the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and the obtained measured range limit data code type identifier HN81 to obtain the first memory address AM8T and to use the storage unit 332 to access the target range threshold pair DN1T stored in the first memory location YM8T to obtain the target range threshold pair DN1T based on the obtained first memory address AM 8T.
For example, the second memory address AX8T is preset based on the preset function target identifier HA2T, the preset measured value target range code EM1T and the preset control code type identifier HC 81. On condition that the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 obtains the second memory address AX8T based on the obtained function target identifier HA2T, the obtained measured value target range code EM1T and the obtained control code type identifier HC81, and uses the storage unit 332 to access the control code CC1T stored in the second memory location YX8T to obtain the control code CC1T based on the obtained second memory address AX 8T.
In some embodiments, on the condition that the processing unit 331 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, the processing unit 331 performs the signal generation control GY81 for controlling the output unit 338 based on the obtained function target identifier HA2T and the obtained control code CC 1T. The output unit 338 performs the signal generation operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 in response to the signal generation control GY81 to generate the function signal SG81, and causes the output unit 338 to transmit the function signal SG81 to the function target 335. The function signal SG81 is used to control the function target 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
For example, the output unit 338 includes an output terminal 338P and an output terminal 338Q. The output 338P is coupled to the functional target 335. The output 338P is coupled to the functional target 735. The output end 338P and the output end 338Q are respectively located at different spatial positions. The preset functional object identifier HA2T is configured to indicate the output 338P. The preset functional object identifier HA22 is configured to indicate the output 338Q. The signal generation control GY81 functions to indicate the output terminal 338P and is used to cause the processing unit 331 to provide a control signal SF81 to the output unit 338. The control signal SF81 serves to indicate the output 338P. The output unit 338 performs the signal generating operation BY81 using the output terminal 338P to transmit the function signal SG81 to the function target 335 in response to one of the signal generating control GY81 and the control signal SF 81.
In some embodiments, the input unit 337 receives a control signal SC97 from the control device 212. The control signal SC97 conveys the functional target identifier HA 22. On condition that the control signal SC97 delivers the functional target identifier HA22, the processing unit 331 obtains the functional target identifier HA22 from the control signal SC97 in response to the control signal SC97 and provides a control signal SD82 to the control terminal 363C based on the obtained functional target identifier HA 22. For example, the control signal SD82 is a selection control signal, functions to indicate the input 3632, and is different from the control signal SD 81.
The multiplexer 363 is responsive to the control signal SD82 to cause the second functional relationship between the input 3632 and the output 363P to be equal to the second conductive relationship. On a condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second conductive relationship, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a sensing signal SN 91. The processing unit 331 receives the sense signal SN91 from the sense unit 334 and obtains a measurement value VN91 in the specified measurement value format HH81 based on the received sense signal SN 91.
In a specific case, the processing unit 331 performs signal generation control GY97 for controlling the output unit 338 based on the obtained measurement value VN91 and the obtained function target identifier HA 22. The signal generation control GY97 functions to indicate the output 338Q and is used to cause the processing unit 331 to provide a control signal SF97 to the output unit 338. The control signal SF97 serves to indicate the output 338Q. The output unit 338 performs a signal generating operation BY97 using the output terminal 338Q to transmit a function signal SG97 to the function target 735 in response to one of the signal generating control GY97 and the control signal SF 97. The function signal SG97 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU 2A.
Please refer to fig. 26, which is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9035 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. The control system 901 includes the control-target device 130 and the control device 212 for controlling the control-target device 130. The control-target device 130 has the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized on the basis of the physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by the measured value target range RN 1T. Said control means 212 for controlling said variable physical parameter QU1A comprise a sensing unit 260 and said operating unit 297.
The sense unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to generate a sense signal SM 81. For example, the variable physical parameter QP1A is characterized based on the physical parameter application range RC1EL represented by the measurement value application range RM 1L. The operation unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 260. The operation unit 297 obtains the measurement value VM81 in response to the sense signal SM81 on the condition that the trigger event EQ81 occurs. On condition that the operation unit 297 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL at which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the mathematical relationship KA81 between the measured value VM81 and the measured value application range RM1L, the operation unit 297 generates the control signal SC81 functioning to indicate the measured value target range RN 1T.
Please refer to fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9036 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. In some embodiments, the sensing unit 260 is configured to comply with sensor specification FQ11 associated with the measurement value application range RM 1L. For example, the sensor specification FQ11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YQ 81. The sensor sensitivity YQ81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 260 to generate HE 81. The variable physical parameter QU1A is further controlled by means of the sensing unit 334. The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 associated with the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing the sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is different from the sensor sensitivity YQ 81.
The measurement value VM81 is obtained by the operation unit 297 in a specified measurement value format HQ 81. The variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 that is different from the physical parameter application range RC1 EL. The measured value application range RM1L and the measured value candidate range RM12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are both preset with the specified measured value format HQ81 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GQ 81. The measured value target range RN1T is preset based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and has the target range threshold pair DN 1T.
The variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable length of time LF 8A. For example, the variable length of time LF8A is characterized based on the reference length of time LJ 8T. The reference time length LJ8T is represented by a time length value CL 8T. The control signal SC81 delivers the target range threshold pair DN1T, the time length value CL8T and the control code CC1T and serves to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to be sufficient within the physical parameter target range RD1ET for an application time length LT8T matching the reference time length LJ 8T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the target range threshold pair DN 1T.
The measurement application range RM1L has an application range threshold pair DM 1L. For example, the application range threshold pair DM1L is preset. The operation unit 297 obtains the application range threshold pair DM1L in response to the trigger event EQ81 and checks the mathematical relationship KA81 by comparing the measurement value VM81 with the obtained application range threshold pair DM 1L. The measurement candidate range RM12 has a candidate range threshold pair DM 1B. For example, the candidate range threshold pair DM1B is preset. The operation unit 297 obtains the preset candidate range threshold pair DM1B in response to the trigger event EQ 81.
In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL that is outside of the physical parameter application range RC1 EL. On the condition that the operation unit 297 determines, by checking the mathematical relationship KA81, that the corresponding physical parameter range RW1EL, in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the operation unit 297 performs data comparison CA91 between the measured value VM81 and the obtained reference range threshold pair DM 1B. On the condition that the operation unit 297 determines, based on the data comparison CA91, that the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2, in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the operation unit 297 generates a control signal SC82 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A, the control signal SC82 being different from the control signal SC 81.
On condition that the operation unit 297 determines, by checking the mathematical relationship KA81, that the physical parameter application range RC1EL, in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the operation unit 297 is configured to obtain a control data code CK8T including the target range threshold pair DN1T, the time length value CL8T and the control code CC1T, perform a signal generation control GS81 for generating the control signal SC81 based on the control data code CK8T, and perform an ensuring operation GT81, the ensuring operation GT81 being used to cause a physical parameter application range code UM8L representing the determined physical parameter application range RC1EL to be recorded. The variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QP1A belong to the physical parameter type TU11 and physical parameter type TP11, respectively. For example, the physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the physical parameter type TP 11.
Please refer to fig. 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32. Fig. 28 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9037 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 29 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9038 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 30 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9039 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 31 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9040 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 32 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9041 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 28, 29, 30, 31, and 32, each of the implementation structure 9029, the implementation structure 9030, the implementation structure 9031, the implementation structure 9032, and the implementation structure 9033 includes the control device 212 and the control-target device 130.
Please refer to fig. 26 additionally. In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QP1A are formed at the actual location LD81 and the actual location LC81 different from the actual location LD81, respectively. The operation unit 297 is configured to execute a trigger application function FB81 associated with the physical parameter application range RC1EL and comprises a processing unit 230 coupled to the sensing unit 260 and an output unit 240 coupled to the processing unit 230. The trigger application function FB81 is configured to comply with the trigger application function specification GBL8 associated with the physical parameter application range RC1 EL.
The sensing unit 260 is configured to comply with sensor specification FQ11 associated with the measurement value application range RM 1L. For example, the sensor specification FQ11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 for representing a sensor sensitivity YQ 81. The sensor sensitivity YQ81 is related to the sensing signal performed by the sensing unit 260 to generate HE 81. For example, when the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to perform the sensing signal generation HE81 depending on the sensor sensitivity YQ81, the sensing signal generation HE81 for generating the sensing signal SM 81.
The variable physical parameter QU1A is controlled by means of the sensing unit 334. The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11 associated with the measured value target range RN 1T. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 for representing the sensor sensitivity YW 81. The sensor sensitivity YW81 is different from the sensor sensitivity YQ 81.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is responsive to the sense signal SM81 to obtain the measurement value VM81 in a specified measurement value format HQ81 on a condition that the triggering event EQ81 occurs. For example, the specified measurement value format HQ81 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UX 81. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the physical parameter application range RC1EL the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC 81. The variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RC 1E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E is represented by a nominal measured value range RC1N and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, … represented by a plurality of different measured value reference ranges RM11, RM12, …, respectively.
The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, … include the physical parameter application range RC1 EL. The trigger application function specification GBL8 includes the sensor specification FQ11, a nominal physical parameter range representation GB8E for representing the nominal physical parameter range RC1E, and a physical parameter application range representation GB8L for representing the physical parameter application range RC1 EL. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a physical parameter candidate range representation GA 8T. For example, the physical parameter candidate range indicates that GA8T is preset.
The nominal measurement value range RC1N is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 on the basis of the nominal physical parameter range representation GB8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and a data coding operation ZR81 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GB1E, has a nominal range threshold pair DC1A and contains the plural different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, … represented by plural different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, …, respectively. For example, the nominal range threshold is preset for DC1A with the specified measurement value format HQ 81.
In some embodiments, the plurality of different measurement reference ranges RM11, RM12, … include the measurement application range RM 1L. The measurement value application range RM1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EH1L included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, …, and has an application range threshold pair DM 1L; whereby the measurement value application range code EH1L is configured to indicate the physical parameter application range RC1 EL. For example, the plurality of different measurement reference range codes EH11, EH12, … are all preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL 8.
The application range threshold pair DM1L contains an application range threshold DM15 of the measurement application range RM1L and an application range threshold DM16 relative to the application range threshold DM15 and is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 based on the physical parameter application range representation GB8L, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and a data encoding operation ZR82 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GB 8L. The measured value application range RM1L is preset with the specified measured value format HQ81 based on the physical parameter application range representation GB8L, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and the data encoding operation ZR 82.
The measured value target range RN1T is preset based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW81 and the data encoding operation ZX83 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GA 8T. The control device 212 further includes a storage unit 250 coupled to the processing unit 230. The storage unit 250 stores the preset rated range threshold pair DC1A and a variable physical parameter range code UM 8A. For example, the measurement target range RN1T has a target range threshold pair DN 1T.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter range code UM8A is equal to a particular measurement value range code EH14 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, … when the trigger event EQ81 occurs. For example, the particular measurement value range code EH14 indicates a particular physical parameter range RC1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 230 based on the sensing operation ZM 81. The specific physical parameter range RC1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, …. The sensing operation ZM81 performed by the sensing unit 260 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QP 1A. Before the occurrence of the triggering event EQ81, the specific measurement value range code EH14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UM 8A.
For example, before the triggering event EQ81 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the specific measurement value range code EH 14. On the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the specific physical parameter range RC1E4 on the basis of the sensing operation ZM81 before the occurrence of the triggering event EQ81, the processing unit 230 assigns the obtained specific measurement value range code EH14 to the variable physical parameter range code UM8A by using the storage unit 250. The particular measurement value range code EH14 represents a particular measurement value range configured to represent the particular physical parameter range RC1E 4. The particular measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ11 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GQ 81. For example, the sensing unit 260 performs sensing signal generation dependent on the sensor sensitivity YQ81 by performing the sensing operation ZM81 to generate a sensing signal.
Before the triggering event EQ81 occurs, the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal, obtains a particular measurement value in the specified measurement value format HQ11 in response to the sensing signal, and performs a particular checking operation for checking the mathematical relationship between the particular measurement value and the particular measurement value range. On the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the specific physical parameter range RC1E4 that the variable physical parameter QP1A is in based on the specific checking operation, the processing unit 230 specifies the obtained specific measurement value range code EH14 to the variable physical parameter range code UM8A by using the storage unit 250. The processing unit 230 determines whether the processing unit 230 is to use the storage unit 250 to change the variable physical parameter range code UM8A in response to a particular sensing operation for sensing the variable physical parameter QP 1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the sensing unit 260.
In some embodiments, on condition that the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains an operation reference data code XK81 from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ81 and performs a data determination AE8A using the operation reference data code XK81 by running a data determination program NE8A to determine the measurement value application range code EH1L selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, … to select the measurement value application range RM1L from the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, ….
The operation reference data codes XK81 are identical to allowable reference data codes preset based on the triggered application function specification GBL 8. The data determination program NE8A is built on the basis of the trigger application function specification GBL 8. The data determination AE8A is one of a data determination operation AE81 and a data determination operation AE 82. Under the condition that the operation reference data code XK81 is obtained to be identical to the specific measured value range code EH14 by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UM8A stored in the storage unit 250, the data determination AE8A, which is the data determination operation AE81, determines the measured value application range code EH1L based on the obtained specific measured value range code EH 14. For example, the determined measurement application range code EH1L is the same as or different from the particular measurement range code EH14 obtained.
Under the condition that the operation reference data code XK81 is obtained by accessing the nominal range threshold value pair DC1A stored in the storage unit 250 to be identical to the preset nominal range threshold value pair DC1A, the data determination AE8A, which is the data determination operation AE82, selects the measurement value application range code EH1L from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, … to determine the measurement value application range code EH1L by performing a scientific calculation MF81 using the measurement value VM81 and the obtained nominal range threshold value pair DC 1A. For example, the scientific calculation MF81 was performed based on a specific empirical formula XP 81. The specific empirical formula XP81 is pre-formulated based on the preset nominal range threshold pairs DC1A and the complex number of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, …. For example, the specific empirical formula XP81 is pre-formulated based on the trigger application functional specification GBL 8.
The processing unit 230 obtains the application range threshold pair DM1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and checks the mathematical relationship KA81 to make a logical decision PH81 whether the measurement value VM81 is within the selected measurement value application range RM1L based on a data comparison CA81 between the measurement value VM81 and the obtained application range threshold pair DM 1L. In the affirmative condition of the logical decision PH81, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL that the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in.
For example, on condition that the application range threshold DM15 is different from the application range threshold DM16 and the measurement value VM81 is between the application range threshold DM15 and the application range threshold DM16, the processing unit 230 makes the logical decision PH81 to be positive by comparing the measurement value VM81 with the obtained application range threshold pair DM 1L. On condition that the application range threshold DM15, the application range threshold DM16 and the measurement value VM81 are equal, the processing unit 230 makes the logical decision PH81 to be positive by comparing the measurement value VM81 and the obtained application range threshold pair DM 1L.
In some embodiments, the control device 212 has the variable physical parameter QP 1A. The variable physical parameter QU1A is present in the control-target device 130. The trigger event EQ81 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event, and a recognition media occurrence event, and is applied to the trigger application FB 81. On the condition that the trigger event EQ81, which is the trigger-action event, is to occur, the control-target device 130 is configured to execute a specified functional operation ZH81 in relation to the variable physical parameter QU 1A. For example, the specified function operation ZH81 is used to cause the trigger event to occur.
The trigger application function FB81 is associated with memory cell 25Y 1. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM 1T; whereby the measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL 8. The preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset measurement value target range code EM1T have a mathematical relationship KY81 therebetween.
The memory cell 25Y1 has a memory location PM8L and a memory location PV8L different from the memory location PM8L, stores the application range threshold pair DM1L in the memory location PM8L, and stores a control data code CK8T in the memory location PV 8L. For example, the memory location PM8L and the memory location PV8L are both identified based on the measurement application range code EH1L being preset. The control data code CK8T includes the measurement value target range code EM 1T. For example, the app range threshold pair DM1L and the control data code CK8T are both stored by the memory cell 25Y1 based on the preset measurement app range code EH 1L.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 performs the data acquisition AF8A using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L by running a data acquisition program NF8A to obtain the application range threshold pair DM 1L. For example, the data acquisition AF8A is one of a data acquisition operation AF81 and a data acquisition operation AF 82. The data acquisition program NF8A is built based on the trigger application function specification GBL 8. The data acquisition operation AF81 uses the memory cell 25Y1 to access the application range threshold pair DM1L stored in the memory location PM1L to obtain the application range threshold pair DM1L based on the determined measurement application range code EH 1L.
The data acquisition operation AF82 retrieves the preset nominal range threshold pair DC1A by reading the nominal range threshold pair DC1A stored in the storage unit 250 and obtains the applied range threshold pair DM1L by performing a scientific calculation MG81 using the determined measured value applied range code EH1L and the retrieved nominal range threshold pair DC 1A. For example, the nominal range threshold pair DC1A contains a nominal range threshold DC11 of the nominal measurement value range RC1N and a nominal range threshold DC12 relative to the nominal range threshold DC11 and is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GB8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and the data encoding operation ZR 81.
In some embodiments, on a condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL that the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 performs data acquisition AG8A that uses the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to obtain a control application code UA 8T. For example, the data acquisition AG8A is one of a data acquisition operation AG81 and a data acquisition operation AG 82.
The data acquisition operation AG81 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK8T stored in the memory location PV8L based on the determined measurement application range code EH1L to obtain the control application code UA8T equal to the control data code CK 8T. The data obtaining operation AG82 obtains the control application code UA8T equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by performing a scientific calculation MQ81 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the mathematical relationship KY 81.
The processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS81 for the trigger application function FB81 within an operation time TD81 based on the obtained control application code UA8T to control the output unit 240. The output unit 240 performs a signal generation operation BS81 for the trigger application function FB81 to generate the control signal SC81 in response to the signal generation control GS 81. For example, the control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the measured value target range code EM1T and serves to bring the variable physical parameter QU1A within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. For example, the control signal SC81 conveys the control information CG 81. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control information CG81 based on the obtained control application code UA 8T.
In some embodiments, the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, … further include a physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RC1 EL. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, … has a total reference range number NS81 and further comprises a measurement value candidate range RM12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E 2. The trigger application function specification GBL8 further comprises a physical parameter candidate range representation GB82 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RC1E 2.
The measurement value candidate range RM12 is represented by a measurement value candidate range code EH12 different from the measurement value application range code EH1L, has a candidate range threshold pair DM1B, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RC1E 2; whereby the measurement value candidate range code EH12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RC1E 2. For example, the candidate range threshold pair DM1B is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GB82, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and a data encoding operation ZR83 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GB 82.
The measured value candidate range RM12 is preset with the specified measured value format HQ81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GB82, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and the data encoding operation ZR 83. The total reference range number NS81 is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL 8. The processing unit 230 obtains the total reference range number NS81 in response to the trigger event EQ 81. The scientific calculation MF81 further uses the obtained total reference range number NS 81. The scientific calculation MG81 further uses the obtained total reference range number NS 81. For example, the total reference range number NS81 is greater than or equal to 2. For example, the total reference range number NS81 ≧ 3; the total reference range number NS81 ≧ 4; the total reference range number NS81 ≧ 5; the total reference range number NS81 ≧ 6; and the total reference range number NS81 ≦ 255.
In some embodiments, the control-target device 130 receives the control signal SC81, obtains the measured-value target-range code EM1T from the received control signal SC81, and causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical-parameter target range RD1ET based on the obtained measured-value target-range code EM 1T. For example, the control signal SC81 conveys control information CG81 which is determined on the basis of the control application code UA 8T. The control information CG81 includes the measurement value target range code EM 1T. For example, the control information CG81 includes the target range threshold pair DN1T and the control code CC 1T.
The measured value application range RM1L is a first part of the nominal measured value range RC 1N. The measurement value candidate range RM12 is a second part of the nominal measurement value range RC 1N. The physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are separate or adjacent. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are separated, the measurement value application range RM1L and the measurement value candidate range RM12 are separated. On the condition that the physical parameter application range RC1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 are adjacent, the measured value application range RM1L and the measured value candidate range RM12 are adjacent.
For example, the measurement value application range code EH1L is configured to be equal to an integer. The nominal range threshold DC12 is greater than the nominal range threshold DC 11. The nominal range threshold DC12 and the nominal range threshold DC11 have a relative value VC11 with respect to the nominal range threshold DC 11. The relative value VC11 is equal to the calculation of the nominal range threshold DC12 minus the nominal range threshold DC 11. For example, the application range threshold pair DM1L is preset based on the rated range threshold DC11, the rated range threshold DC12, the integer, and the ratio of the relative value VC11 to the total reference range number NS 11. The scientific calculation MG81 uses one of the rated range threshold DC11, the rated range threshold DC12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, on condition that the logical decision PH81 is negative, the processing unit 230 determines the measurement value candidate range code EH12 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, … by performing a fourth scientific calculation MF12 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L in order to select the measurement value candidate range RM12 from the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, ….
The processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range threshold pair DM1B based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EH12 and checks the mathematical relationship KA91 between the measurement value VM81 and the selected measurement value candidate range RM12 based on a data comparison CA91 between the measurement value VM81 and the obtained candidate range threshold pair DM1B to make a logical decision PH91 whether the measurement value VM81 is within the selected measurement value candidate range RM 12. In the affirmative condition of the logical decision PH91, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 that the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in.
On condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2, in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to perform a signal generation operation BS91 for the trigger application function FB81 to generate a control signal SC82 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A, the control signal SC82 being different from the control signal SC 81.
On the condition that the specific measurement value range code EH14 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL, in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, by making the logical decision PH81, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to the variable physical parameter range code UM8A based on a code difference DA81 between the variable physical parameter range code UM8A equal to the specific measurement value range code EH14 and the determined measurement value application range code EH 1L. On the condition that the trigger event EQ81 is the state change event for which the variable physical parameter QP1A enters the physical parameter application range RC1EL from the specific physical parameter range RC1E4, the processing unit 230 determines the trigger event EQ81 that is the state change event based on the code difference DA 81.
In some embodiments, the operation unit 297 further includes a response area AC1, a reader 220, and an input unit 270. The response area AC1 is used to execute the trigger application function FB 81. The reader 220 is coupled to the response area AC 1. The input unit 270 is coupled to the processing unit 230. On the condition that the trigger event EQ81 is the identification medium occurrence event and the processing unit 230 recognizes the identification medium 310 occurring in the response area AC1 through the reader 220, the processing unit 230 obtains the measurement value VM81 based on the sensing signal SM 81.
When the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the output unit 240 displays a status indication LA 81. For example, the status indication LA81 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QP1A is configured within a particular status XH81 within the particular physical parameter range RC1E 4. On the condition that the particular measurement value range code EH14 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by making the logical decision PH81, the processing unit 230 further causes the output unit 240 to change the status indication LA81 to a status indication LA82 based on the code difference DA 81. For example, the status indication LA82 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QP1A is configured within a particular status XH82 within the physical parameter application range RC1 EL.
On the condition that the input unit 270 receives the control back signal SE81 generated in response to the control signal SC81 from the control-target device 130 within the specified time TW81 after the operation time TD81, the processing unit 230 performs a specified actual operation BJ81 with respect to the variable physical parameter QU1A in response to the control back signal SE 81. After the operation time TD81, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to generate a sensing signal SM 82. For example, after the operation time TD81, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to perform sensing signal generation HE82 depending on the sensor sensitivity YQ81, the sensing signal generation HE82 is used to generate the sensing signal SM 82.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is responsive to the sense signal SM82 to obtain the measurement value VM82 in the specified measurement value format HQ81 within a specified time TE82 after the operating time TD 81. The processing unit 230 obtains a specific measurement value range code EH17 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EH11, EH12, … by performing a scientific calculation MF83 using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L within the specified time TE 82. For example, the specific measurement value range code EH17 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and represents a specific measurement value range RM17 comprised in the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RM11, RM12, ….
The specific measurement value range RM17 represents a specific physical parameter range RC1E7 comprised in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RC1E1, RC1E2, …. The processing unit 230 executes a check operation BA83 for checking the mathematical relationship KA83 between the measurement value VM82 and the specific measurement value range RM17 on the basis of the specific measurement value range code EH 17.
In some embodiments, on condition that the processing unit 230 determines, within the specified time TE82, based on the checking operation BA83, that the particular physical parameter range RC1E7 the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC83 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A and uses the storage unit 250 to assign the particular measurement value range code EH17 to the variable physical parameter range code UM 8A. For example, the control signal SC83 is different from the control signal SC 81.
On the condition that the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the sense unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A at constraint condition FP81 to provide the sense signal SM81 to the processing unit 230. For example, the constraint condition FP81 is that the variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to a particular physical parameter QP15 included in the nominal physical parameter range RC 1E. The processing unit 230 estimates the specific physical parameter QP15 based on the sense signal SM81 to obtain the measurement value VM 81. Since the variable physical parameter QP1A in the constraint condition FP81 is within the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the processing unit 230 recognizes the measurement value VM81 as an allowable value within the measurement value application range RM1L, thereby recognizing the mathematical relationship KA81 between the measurement value VM81 and the measurement value application range RM1L as a value intersection relationship, and thereby determining the physical parameter application range RC1EL in which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located.
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 260 is characterized based on the sensor sensitivity YQ81 associated with the sense signal generation HE81 and is configured to comply with the sensor specification FQ 11. The sensor specification FQ11 includes the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 for representing the sensor sensitivity YQ81 and a sensor measurement range representation GQ8R for representing a sensor measurement range RA 8E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E is configured to be the same as the sensor measurement range RA8E or is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RA 8E. The sensor measurement range RA8E is related to the sensing of the physical parameter performed by the first sensing unit 260. The sensor measurement range representation GQ8R is provided based on a first preset unit of measurement. For example, the first predetermined measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an english measurement unit.
The nominal measurement value range RC1N and the nominal range threshold pair DC1A are both preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GB8E, the sensor measurement range representation GQ8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and the data encoding operation ZR 81. The measurement value application range RM1L and the application range threshold pair DM1L are both preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 based on the physical parameter application range representation GB8L, the sensor measurement range representation GQ8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and the data encoding operation ZR 82.
The measurement value candidate range RM12 and the candidate range threshold pair DM1B are both preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GB82, the sensor measurement range representation GQ8R, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and the data encoding operation ZR 83. The nominal physical parameter range representation GB8E, the physical parameter application range representation GB8L, the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T and the physical parameter candidate range representation GB82 are all provided based on a second preset unit of measure. For example, the second predetermined unit of measurement is one of metric unit of measurement and english unit of measurement, and is the same as or different from the first predetermined unit of measurement. For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is configured to be part of the sensor measurement range RB 8E.
The variable physical parameter QP1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RA 8E. For example, the sensor measurement range representation GQ8R, the nominal physical parameter range representation GB8E, the physical parameter application range representation GB8L, the physical parameter candidate range representation GA8T, the physical parameter candidate range representation GB82 and the sensor measurement range representation GW8R all belong to the decimal data type. The measured value VM81, the measured value VM82, the nominal range threshold pair DC1A, the application range threshold pair DM1L, the target range threshold pair DN1T, and the candidate range threshold pair DM1B all belong to the binary data type and are all suitable for computer processing. The sensor specification FQ11, the sensor specification FU11, and the trigger application function specification GBL8 are all preset.
In some embodiments, the memory location PM8L is identified based on memory address FM 8L. The memory address FM8L is preset based on the preset measurement application range code EH 1L. The memory location PV8L is identified based on memory address FV 8L. The memory address FV8L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EH 1L.
Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 is configured to retrieve the preset measurement value application range code EH1L, the preset application range threshold pair DM1L and the preset control data code CK8T, to obtain the memory address FM8L based on the retrieved measurement value application range code EH1L, and to cause the operating unit 297 to provide write request information WB8L including the retrieved application range threshold pair DM1L and the obtained memory address FM8L based on the retrieved application range threshold pair DM1L and the obtained memory address FM 8L. For example, the write request information WB8L is used to cause the memory cell 25Y1 to store the application range threshold pair DM1L conveyed in the memory location PM 8L.
Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 applies a range code EH1L to obtain the memory address FV8L on the basis of the retrieved measured value and, on the basis of the retrieved control data code CK8T and the obtained memory address FV8L, causes the operation unit 297 to provide write request information WA8L including the retrieved control data code CK8T and the obtained memory address FV 8L. For example, the write request information WA8L is used to cause the memory cell 25Y1 to store the conveyed control data code CK8T at the memory location PV 8L.
The control device 212 is coupled to a server 280. The identification medium 310 is one of an electronic tag 350, a barcode medium 360, and a biometric interaction medium 370. One of the electronic tag 350, the storage unit 250, and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y 1. For example, the storage unit 250 has a storage space SS 11. The storage space SS11 has the variable physical parameter range code UM8A, the nominal range threshold pair DC1A and the total reference range number NS 81.
Please refer to fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9042 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 33, the implementation structure 9042 includes the control device 212, the control target device 130, and the server 280. The control device 212 is linked to the server 280. The control device 212 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control-target device 130 in dependence on the trigger event EQ81, and includes the operation unit 297 and the sensing unit 260. The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240. The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280.
The control device 212 is disposed in the application environment EX 81. The variable physical parameter QP1A exists in the physical parameter formation area AT 11. One of the control device 212 and the application environment EX81 has the variable physical parameter QP 1A. For example, the sensing unit 260 is coupled to the physical parameter formation region AT11 with the variable physical parameter QP 1A. The variable physical parameter QU1A is present in the physical parameter formation area AU 11. For example, under the condition that the physical parameter formation area AT11 is located in the application environment EX81, the physical parameter formation area AT11 is adjacent to the control device 212.
For example, the physical parameter formation area AU11 and the physical parameter formation area AT11 are separate and formed AT the actual position LD81 and the actual position LC81, respectively; thereby, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QP1A are formed at the actual location LD81 and the actual location LC81 different from the actual location LD81, respectively. For example, the physical parameter formation area AT11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area. For example, the physical parameter formation area AU11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area.
For example, the processing unit 230 is responsive to the trigger event EQ81 to cause the variable physical parameter QP1A to be formed in the physical parameter formation area AT 11. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A exists in the physical parameter formation area AT11, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the sense signal SM 81. For example, the physical parameter formation area AT11 is a user interface area.
In some embodiments, the control-target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the sensing unit 334 coupled to the operation unit 397, and a functional target 335 coupled to the operation unit 397. The function target 335 is controlled by the operation unit 397 and includes the physical parameter formation area AU11 having the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RD1E including the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The nominal physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a nominal measurement value range RD1N and comprises a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, … represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, …, respectively. The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, … includes the physical parameter target range RD1ET and a physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2.
The nominal measurement value range RD1N contains the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, … and is preset with the specified measurement value format HQ81 on the basis of the nominal physical parameter range representation GB8E, the sensor sensitivity representation GQ81 and the data encoding operation ZR81 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GB 8E. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, … includes the measurement value target range RN1T and a measurement value candidate range RN12 representing the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. The measurement value candidate range RN12 is represented by a measurement value candidate range code EM12 and has a candidate range threshold pair DN1B, whereby the measurement value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E 2. Before the triggering event EQ81 occurs, the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within a certain physical parameter range RD1E 4. The specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is comprised in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ….
In some embodiments, the triggering event caused by the control-target device 130 is a state-change event. The control device 212 further includes a state change detector 475 coupled to the processing unit 230. For example, the state change detector 475 is one of a limit detector and an edge detector. The limit detector is a limit switch. The status change detector 475 is configured to detect that a characteristic physical parameter associated with a predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL81 reaches ZL 82. The functional object 335 contains a physical parameter application area AJ 11. The physical parameter application area AJ11 has variable physical parameters QG 1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A depends on the variable physical parameter QU1A and is characterized on the basis of the preset characteristic physical parameter UL 81. For example, the physical parameter application area AJ11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area. The predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL81 is related to the variable physical parameter QU 1A.
Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the operation unit 397 causes the function target 335 to perform the specified function operation ZH81 in relation to the variable physical parameter QU 1A. The specified function operation ZH81 is used to control the variable physical parameter QG1A and cause the trigger event EQ81 to occur by changing the variable physical parameter QG 1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A is configured to be in a variable physical state XA 8A. For example, the operation unit 397 is controlled by the control device 212 to cause the function target 335 to perform the specified function operation ZH 81. For example, the nominal measurement value range RD1N has a nominal range threshold pair DD 1A.
On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 before the trigger event EQ81, the specified function operation ZH81 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the preset feature physical parameter UL81 to form the feature physical parameter reach ZL82, and changes the variable physical state XA8A from a non-feature physical parameter reach state XA81 to an actual feature physical parameter reach state XA82 by forming the feature physical parameter reach ZL 82. The state change detector 475 generates a trigger signal SX81 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL 82. For example, the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA82 is characterized based on the preset characteristic physical parameter UL 81. The state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX81 in response to a state change event in which the variable physical parameter QG1A is changed from the non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA81 to the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA 82.
In some embodiments, the input unit 270 is coupled to the state change detector 475. The trigger event EQ81 is the state change event where the variable physical parameter QG1A enters the actual characteristic physical parameter to state XA 82. One of the input unit 270 and the processing unit 230 receives the trigger signal SX 81. The processing unit 230 obtains the control application code UA8T in response to the received trigger signal SX81 and executes the signal generation control GS81 for the trigger application function FB81 within the operation time TD81 based on the obtained control application code UA8T to cause the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC 81.
For example, in the condition that the state change detector 475 is the limit switch, the reaching of the characteristic physical parameter ZL82 is the reaching of the limit position of the variable physical parameter QG1A equal to a variable spatial position to the preset characteristic physical parameter UL81 equal to a preset limit position. For example, the function target 335 forms the variable physical parameter QG1A in the physical parameter application area AJ11 by performing the specified function operation ZH81 caused based on the variable physical parameter QU 1A. Under the condition that the physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the state change detector 475, the state change detector 475 detects that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL 82.
For example, the processing unit 230 uses the sense signal SM81 to obtain the measurement value VM81 in response to the received trigger signal SX 81. On condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL, at which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located, by checking the mathematical relationship KA81 between the measured value VM81 and the measured value application range RM1L, the processing unit 230 performs the data acquisition AG8A using the determined measured value application range code EH1L to obtain the control application code UA8T, and causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC81 serving as an indication of the measured value target range RN1T, based on the obtained control application code UA 8T.
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the sense signal SM 81. For example, on the condition that the triggering event EQ81 occurs, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the sense signal SM 81. After the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC81 within the operation time TD81 by executing the signal generation control GS81, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the sensing signal SM 82. For example, the sensing unit 260 is one of a time sensing unit, an electrical parameter sensing unit, a mechanical parameter sensing unit, an optical parameter sensing unit, a temperature sensing unit, a humidity sensing unit, a motion sensing unit, and a magnetic parameter sensing unit.
For example, the sensing unit 260 includes a sensing element 261 coupled to the processing unit 230, and uses the sensing element 261 to generate the sensing signal SM81 and the sensing signal SM 82. The sensing component 261 is one of a plurality of application sensors. The plurality of application sensors include a voltage sensor, a current sensor, a resistance sensor, a capacitance sensor, an inductance sensor, an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a pressure transducer, a strain gauge, a timer, a light detector, a temperature sensor, and a humidity sensor. For example, the sensing component 261 generates a sensed signal component. The first sense signal SM81 contains the sense signal component.
Please refer to fig. 34, which is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9043 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 34, the implementation structure 9043 includes the control device 212, the control-target device 130, and the server 280. The control device 212 is one of a computing device, a communication device, a user device, a mobile device, a remote control, an electronic device, a portable device, a desktop device, a relative stationary device, a smart phone, and any combination thereof. The electronic tag 350 is one of a passive electronic tag, an active electronic tag, a semi-active electronic tag, a wireless electronic tag, and a wired electronic tag. For example, the control device 212 transmits the control signal SC81 to the control-target device 130 through an actual link between the output unit 240 and the operation unit 397. The actual link is one of a wired link and a wireless link.
In some embodiments, the nominal physical parameter range RC1E contains the particular physical parameter QP15 and is represented by the nominal measurement value range RC 1N. The sense unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A at the constrained condition FP81 to provide the sense signal SM81 to the processing unit 230. For example, the constraint condition FP81 is that the variable physical parameter QP1A is equal to the particular physical parameter QP 15. On condition that the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the processing unit 230 estimates the particular physical parameter QP15 based on the sense signal SM81 to obtain the measurement value VM 81.
The control signal SC81 is one of the electrical signal SP81 and the optical signal SQ 81. The output unit 240 includes an output component 450, a display component 460, and an output component 455. The output component 450 is coupled to the processing unit 230 and is configured to output the electrical signal SP81 if the control signal SC81 is the electrical signal SP 81. For example, the output component 450 is a transmission component. When the triggering event EQ81 occurs, the display component 460 displays the status indication LA 81. On the condition that the particular measurement value range code EH14 is different from the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL that the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in by making the logical decision PH81, the processing unit 230 causes the display component 460 to change the status indication LA81 to the status indication LA82 based on the code difference DA 81.
The display component 460 is coupled to the processing unit 230, and is configured to display the measurement information LY81 related to the measurement value VM81, and to output the optical signal SQ81 under the condition that the control signal SC81 is the optical signal SQ 81. The output component 455 is coupled to the processing unit 230. For example, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the output component 455 to transmit a physical parameter signal SB81 to the control-target device 130. The variable physical parameter QU1A is formed on the basis of the physical parameter signal SB 81. For example, the output component 455 is a transmission component.
In some embodiments, the control device 212 is coupled to the server 280, and further includes a physical parameter forming unit 290 coupled to the sensing unit 260. For example, on the condition that the variable physical parameters QP1A are to be generated by the physical parameter forming unit 290, the physical parameter forming unit 290 generates the variable physical parameters QP 1A. The input unit 270 includes an input component 440 and an input component 445. The input component 440 is coupled to the processing unit 230. For example, one of the input element 440 and the display element 460 includes a user interface area AP 11.
The input component 445 is coupled to the processing unit 230 for receiving the control response signal SE81 and comprises a receiving component 4451 and a reader 4452. The receiving assembly 4451 and the reader 4452 are both coupled to the processing unit 230. The control response signal SE81 is one of the electric signal LP81 and the optical signal LQ 81. The receiving assembly 4451 is configured to receive the electrical signal LP81 under the condition that the control response signal SE81 is the electrical signal LP 81. The reader 4452 is configured to receive the optical signal LQ81 under the condition that the control response signal SE81 is the optical signal LQ 81. For example, one of the electronic tag 350, the storage unit 250, and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y 1.
One of the application environment EX81, the input component 440, the display component 460, and the physical parameter formation unit 290 has the physical parameter formation area AT 11. The processing unit 230 causes the physical parameter formation area AT11 to have the variable physical parameter QP1A by executing a designated function operation BH82 for the trigger application function FB81, and thereby causes the sensing unit 260 to sense the variable physical parameter QP1A AT the constraint condition FP 81. One of the electronic tag 350, the storage unit 250, and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y 1. The sensing unit 260, the storage unit 250, the output module 450, the display module 460, the output module 455, the input module 440, the receiving module 4451, the reader 4452 and the physical parameter forming unit 290 are all controlled by the processing unit 230. For example, one of the sensing unit 260 and the display element 460 includes the physical parameter formation area AT 11.
The variable physical parameter QP1A is one of a fourth variable electrical parameter, a fourth variable mechanical parameter, a fourth variable optical parameter, a fourth variable temperature, a fourth variable voltage, a fourth variable current, a fourth variable electrical power, a fourth variable resistance, a fourth variable capacitance, a fourth variable inductance, a fourth variable frequency, a fourth clock time, a fourth variable time length, a fourth variable brightness, a fourth variable light intensity, a fourth variable volume, a fourth variable data flow rate, a fourth variable amplitude, a fourth variable spatial position, a fourth variable displacement, a fourth variable sequence position, a fourth variable angle, a fourth variable spatial length, a fourth variable distance, a fourth variable translation speed, a fourth variable angular speed, a fourth variable acceleration, a fourth variable force, a fourth variable pressure, and a fourth variable mechanical power.
In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the specific physical parameter range RC1E4 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the fourth variable voltage, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high voltage range and a relatively low voltage range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the fourth variable current, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high current range and a relatively low current range, respectively. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the fourth variable resistance, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high resistance range and a relatively low resistance range, respectively.
On a condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the fourth variable spatial position, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high position range and a relatively low position range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the fourth variable pressure, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high pressure range and a relatively low pressure range, respectively. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the fourth variable length, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high length range and a relatively low length range, respectively. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the fourth variable angular velocity, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high angular velocity range and a relatively low angular velocity range, respectively.
For example, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range. For example, the physical parameter application range RC1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the specific physical parameter range RC1E7 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range. For example, the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2 is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter candidate range RC1E3 is the other of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range.
In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QP1A is in a first reference state on a condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is within the physical parameter application range RC1 EL. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is within the particular physical parameter range RC1E4, the variable physical parameter QP1A is in a second reference state. On a condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RC1E2, the variable physical parameter QP1A is in a third reference state. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is within the particular physical parameter range RC1E7, the variable physical parameter QP1A is in a fourth reference state. The first reference state is the same as or different from the second reference state. The second reference state is different from the third reference state. The first reference state is different from the fourth reference state.
For example, the measurement value application range code EH1L is a measurement value reference range number. The measured value application range RM1L is arranged in the nominal measured value range RC1N on the basis of the measured value application range code EH 1L. The measurement value candidate range code EH12 is a measurement value reference range number. The measurement value candidate range RM12 is arranged in the nominal measurement value range RC1N on the basis of the measurement value candidate range code EH 12. The measured value target range code EM1T is a measured value reference range number. The measured value target range RN1T is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N on the basis of the measured value target range code EM 1T.
For example, the variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable voltage. The physical parameter application range RC1EL, the specific physical parameter range RC1E4, and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are a first voltage reference range, a second voltage reference range, and a third voltage reference range, respectively. For example, on the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the second variable displacement, the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the specific physical parameter range RC1E4, and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are a first displacement reference range, a second displacement reference range, and a third displacement reference range, respectively. For example, on the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the second clock time, the physical parameter application range RC1EL, the specific physical parameter range RC1E4, and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are a first clock time reference range, a second clock time reference range, and a third clock time reference range, respectively.
For example, the operation unit 297 includes a communication interface unit 246 coupled to the processing unit 230. The processing unit 230 is coupled to the network 410 through the communication interface unit 246. For example, the communication interface unit 246 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and includes the output component 450 coupled to the processing unit 230 and the receiving component 4451 coupled to the processing unit 230. The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 through the communication interface unit 246 and the network 410.
Please refer to fig. 35, 36 and 37. Fig. 35 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9044 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 36 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9045 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9046 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 35, 36, and 37, each of the implementation structure 9044, the implementation structure 9045, and the implementation structure 9046 includes the control device 212, the control-target device 130, and the server 280. The control device 212 is linked to the server 280. The control device 212 is for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A present in the control-target device 130, and includes the operation unit 297 and the sensing unit 260. The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240, and is coupled to the server 280.
In some embodiments, the trigger application function FB81 is associated with the memory cell 25Y 1. The memory cell 25Y1 stores the control data code CK 8T. The control data code CK8T is one of a control information code CM82, a control information code CM83, a control information code CM84 and a control information code CM 85. The control information CG81 is one of control data information CN82, control data information CN83, control data information CN84 and control data information CN 85.
On condition that the control data code CK8T is the control information code CM82, the control signal SC81 is the command signal SW82 conveying the control data information CN 82. Both the control information code CM82 and the control data information CN82 contain the measured value target range code EM 1T. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the measured value target range code EM1T and serves to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by the measured value target range RN 1T.
On condition that the control data code CK8T is the control information code CM83, the control signal SC81 is the command signal SW83 conveying the control data information CN 83. The control information code CM83 and the control data information CN83 both include the target range threshold pair DN1T, the nominal range threshold pair DD1A, and the control code CC 1T. For example, both the control information code CM83 and the control data information CN83 further include the measured value target range code EM 1T. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by conveying the target range threshold pair DN1T and serves to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by the measured value target range RN 1T.
In some embodiments, the control signal SC81 is the command signal SW84 conveying the control data information CN84, on condition that the control data code CK8T is the control information code CM 84. The control information code CM84 and the control data message CN84 both include a relative reference range code ZB 81. The control signal SC81 serves to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by delivering the relative reference range code ZB81 and serves to bring the variable physical parameter QU1A into the physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by the measured value target range RN 1T.
For example, the operation unit 397 includes a timer 339. The timer 339 is used to measure the variable time length LF8A and is configured to meet a timer specification FT 81. Both the control data code CK8T and the control information CG81 further include the time length value CL 8T. The processing unit 230 sets the time length value CL8T in a specified count value format HH91 based on the reference time length LJ8T and the timer specification FT81, and causes the output unit 240 to perform the signal generating operation BS81 to generate the control signal SC81 conveying the time length value CL8T based on the obtained control data code CK 8T. For example, the specified count value format HH91 is characterized based on the specified number of bits UY 91.
The trigger application function specification GBL8 includes a time length representation GB8 KJ. The time length representation GB8KJ is used to represent the reference time length LJ 8T. For example, the time length value CL8T is preset with the specified count value format HH91 based on the time length representation GB8KJ, the timer specification FT81, and the data encoding operation ZR8KJ for converting the time length representation GB8 KJ. The storage unit 250 stores the control data code CK8T including the time length value CL 8T. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the control data code CK8T from the storage unit 250. For example, the time length representation GB8KJ is identical to the time length representation GA8 KJ.
In some embodiments, the control-target device 130 stores a physical parameter target range code UQ 1T. On condition that the control data code CK8T is the control information code CM85, the control signal SC81 is the command signal SW85 conveying the control data information CN 85. The control information code CM85 and the control data information CN85 both include a time value target range code EL1T and a clock reference time value NR 81. The time value target range code EL1T is preset. On condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measured value target range code EM1T, the control signal SC81 functions to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by delivering the preset time value target range code EL1T and for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET represented by the measured value target range RN 1T.
The operation unit 397 further includes a timer 342. The timer 342 is used to measure a clock time TH1A and is configured to meet a timer specification FT 21. The variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH 1A. The clock time TH1A is characterized based on a clock reference time TR 81. The trigger event EQ81 occurs at trigger time TT 81. The trigger time TT81 is the current time. The clock reference time value NR81 is preset in a specified count value format HH95 based on the clock reference time TR81 and the timer specification FT 21. The time difference between the clock reference time TR81 and the trigger time TT81 is within a preset time length. The timer specification FT81 and the timer specification FT21 are both preset. For example, the specified count value format HH95 is characterized based on the specified number of bits UY 95.
The clock time TH1A is characterized based on a time target interval HR1 ET. The time target interval HR1ET contains the clock reference time TR81 and is represented by a time value reference range RQ 1T. The time value reference range RQ1T is preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the timer specification FT 21. The time value target range code EL1T is configured to indicate the time target interval HR1ET and is preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL 8. The physical parameter target range code UQ1T represents the physical parameter target range RK1ET within which the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the temporal target interval HR1 ET. The physical parameter target range RK1ET is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ….
In some embodiments, the sensing unit 260 senses the clock time TH1A to generate the sensing signal SM81 and acts as a timer, on the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is the same as the clock time TH 1A. For example, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is identical to the clock time TH1A, the measured value application range code EH1L is identical to the time value target range code EL 1T. The processing unit 230, in response to the trigger event EQ81, executes the data determination AE8A to determine the measurement value application range code EH1L that is identical to the time value target range code EL 1T.
For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL that the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 performs the data acquisition AG8A using the determined measurement value application range code EH1L to obtain the control application code UA8T identical to the control data code CK 8T. On the condition that the obtained control data code CK8T contains the preset clock reference time value NR81 and the preset time value target range code EL1T, the processing unit 230, on the basis of the obtained control data code CK8T, causes the output unit 240 to perform the signal generation operation BS81 to generate the control signal SC81 conveying the obtained clock reference time value NR81 and the obtained time value target range code EL 1T.
For example, the physical parameter control function specification GBL8 includes a clock time representation GB8 TR. The clock time representation GB8TR is used to represent the clock reference time TR 81. The clock reference time value NR81 is preset with the specified count value format HH95 based on the clock time representation GB8TR, the timer specification FT21, and a data encoding operation ZR8TR for converting the clock time representation GB8 TR. For example, the clock time representation GB8TR is identical to the clock time representation GA8 TR.
In some embodiments, the control-target device 130 further includes a storage unit 332 coupled to the operation unit 397. The storage unit 332 has a memory location YM8T and a memory location YX8T that is different from the memory location YM 8T. For example, the memory location YM8T is identified based on the memory address AM 8T. The memory location YX8T is identified based on a memory address AX 8T. The memory address AM8T and the memory address AX8T are both preset based on the preset measured value target range code EM 1T.
Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 obtains input data DJ81 from the input unit 270 by means of the user interface region AP11, performs a data encoding operation EJ81 on the input data DJ81 to determine the preset target range threshold pair DN1T, is configured to obtain the preset measured value target range code EM1T, and obtains the memory address AM8T based on the obtained measured value target range code EM 1T. For example, before the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JV81 for operating the user interface region AP11, and provides the input data DJ81 to the processing unit 230 in response to the user input operation JV 81.
Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide write request information WN8T to the operation unit 397 based on the determined target range threshold pair DN1T and the retrieved memory address AM 8T. The write request information WN8T includes the determined target range threshold pair DN1T and the retrieved memory address AM 8T. The operation unit 397 responds to the write request information WN8T to cause the storage unit 332 to store the target range threshold pair DN1T at the memory location YM 8T.
In some embodiments, before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 relies on the user interface area AP11 to obtain input data DJ82 from the input unit 270, performs a data encoding operation EJ82 on the input data DJ82 to determine the control code CC1T that is preset, and obtains the memory address AX8T based on the obtained measured value target range code EM 1T. For example, before the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JV82 for operating the user interface region AP11, and provides the input data DJ82 to the processing unit 230 in response to the user input operation JV 82.
Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide the second write request information WC8T to the operation unit 397 based on the determined control code CC1T and the retrieved memory address AX 8T. The second write request information WC8T contains the determined control code CC1T and the retrieved memory address AX 8T. The operation unit 397 responds to the write request information WC8T to cause the storage unit 332 to store the control code CC1T in the memory location YX 8T.
The storage unit 332 further has a memory location YN 81. For example, the memory location YN81 is identified based on memory address AN 81. The memory address AN81 is preset. Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 relies on the user interface area AP11 to obtain input data DJ83 from the input unit 270, performs data encoding operations EJ83 on the input data DJ83 to determine the predetermined nominal range threshold pair DD1A, and is configured to retrieve the predetermined memory address AN 81. For example, before the trigger event EQ81 occurs, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JV83 for operating the user interface region AP11, and provides the input data DJ83 to the processing unit 230 in response to the user input operation JV 83.
Before the occurrence of the trigger event EQ81, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide the write request information WD81 to the operation unit 397 based on the determined nominal range threshold pair DD1A and the retrieved memory address AN 81. The write request information WD81 includes the determined nominal range threshold pair DD1A and the retrieved memory address AN 81. The operation unit 397 responds to the write request information WD81 to cause the storage unit 332 to store the nominal range threshold pair DD1A in the memory location YN 81.
Please refer to fig. 38, 39, 40 and 41. Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9047 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 39 is a schematic diagram of an implementation 9048 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 40 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9049 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9050 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 38, 39, 40, and 41, each of the implementation structure 9047, the implementation structure 9048, the implementation structure 9049, and the implementation structure 9050 includes the control device 212, the control-target device 130, and the server 280. The control device 212 is linked to the server 280. The control device 212 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control-target device 130 in dependence on the trigger event EQ81, and includes the operation unit 297 and the sensing unit 260. The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240. The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280.
In some embodiments, the control-target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the function target 335, the sensing unit 334, a function target 735, and a multiplexer 363. The operation unit 397 has an output 338P and an output 338Q. The output end 338P and the output end 338Q are respectively located at different spatial positions. The functional target 335, the sensing unit 334, the functional target 735, and the multiplexer 363 are all coupled to the operation unit 397. The output 338P is coupled to the functional target 335. The functional object 735 includes a physical parameter formation area AU21 and is coupled to the output 338Q. The physical parameter formation area AU21 has variable physical parameters QU 2A. For example, the functional object 735 is a physically realizable functional object and has a functional structure similar to the functional object 335.
The sensing unit 334 is configured to sense one of the plurality of actual physical parameters through the multiplexer 363. Said complex actual physical parameters comprise said variable physical parameter QU1A and said variable physical parameter QU 2A. Said control means 212 are intended to control said variable physical parameter QU 2A. The multiplexer 363 has an input 3631, an input 3632, a control 363C and an output 363P.
The control terminal 363C is coupled to the operation unit 397. The input 3631 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU 11. The input 3632 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU 21. The output 363P is coupled to the sensing unit 334. For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QU2A are a fifth variable electrical parameter and a sixth variable electrical parameter, respectively. For example, the fifth variable electrical parameter and the sixth variable electrical parameter are a fifth variable voltage and a sixth variable voltage, respectively. The input end 3631 and the output end 363P have a first functional relationship. The first functional relationship is equal to one of a first on relationship and a first off relationship.
A second functional relationship exists between the input 3632 and the output 363P. The second functional relationship is equal to one of a second on relationship and a second off relationship. On the condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first on-state relationship, the sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output 363P and the input 3631, and is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11 through the output 363P and the input 3631. On the condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second on-state relationship, the sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU2A through the output 363P and the input 3632, and is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU21 through the output 363P and the input 3632. For example, the multiplexer 363 is controlled by the operation unit 397 and is an analog multiplexer.
In some embodiments, one of the control device 212 and the application environment EX81 has a physical parameter formation area AT 21. The physical parameter formation area AT21 has a variable physical parameter QP 2A. The control device 212 further includes a multiplexer 263 coupled to the processing unit 230. The multiplexer 263 has an input 2631, an input 2632, a control terminal 263C and an output 263P. The control end 263C is coupled to the processing unit 230.
The input 2631 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AT 11. The input 2632 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AT 21. The output terminal 263P is coupled to the sensing unit 260. For example, the variable physical parameter QP1A and the variable physical parameter QP2A are a seventh variable electrical parameter and an eighth variable electrical parameter, respectively. For example, the seventh variable electrical parameter and the eighth variable electrical parameter are a seventh variable voltage and an eighth variable voltage, respectively. A third functional relationship exists between the input 2631 and the output 263P. The third functional relationship is equal to one of a third on relationship and a third off relationship.
A fourth functional relationship exists between the input 2632 and the output 263P. The fourth functional relationship is equal to one of a fourth on relationship and a fourth off relationship. Under the condition that the third functional relationship is equal to the third on-state relationship, the sensing unit 260 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QP1A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631, and is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AT11 through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631. Under the condition that the fourth functional relationship is equal to the fourth on-state relationship, the sensing unit 260 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QP2A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2632, and is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AT21 through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2632. For example, the multiplexer 263 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is an analog multiplexer.
In some embodiments, the functional object 335 is identified by a functional object identifier HA 2T. The functional object 735 is identified by a functional object identifier HA 22. The function target 335 and the function target 735 are respectively located at different spatial positions and are both coupled to the operation unit 397. The functional target identifier HA2T and the functional target identifier HA22 are both preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL 8. To control the functional target 335, the control signal SC81 further conveys the functional target identifier HA 2T. The operating unit 397 receives the control signal SC81 from the control device 212. The operating unit 397 selects the functional object 335 for control in response to the control signal SC 81. For example, the functional destination identifier HA2T is configured to indicate the output 338P and is a first functional destination number. The function target identifier HA22 is configured to indicate the output 338Q and is a second function target number.
The control device 212 further includes an electrical usage target 285 coupled to the processing unit 230, and an electrical usage target 286 coupled to the processing unit 230. The electrical usage target 285 is identified by an electrical usage target identifier HZ 2T. The electrical usage target 286 is identified by an electrical usage target identifier HZ 22. The electrical usage target identifier HZ2T and the electrical usage target identifier HZ22 are both preset based on the trigger application function specification GBL 8. On the condition that the triggering event EQ81 occurs in dependence on the electrical usage target 285, the processing unit 230 selects the functional target 335 for control in response to the triggering event EQ 81. On the condition that the triggering event EQ81 occurs in dependence on the electrical usage target 286, the processing unit 230 selects the functional target 735 to control in response to the triggering event EQ 81.
In some embodiments, the storage unit 250 HAs a memory location XC9T and a memory location XC92, stores the functional target identifier HA2T at XC9T, and stores the functional target identifier HA22 at XC 92. The memory location XC9T is identified by memory address EC9T, or is identified based on the memory address EC 9T. The memory address EC9T is preset based on the electrical usage target identifier HZ 2T; thereby, the electrical usage target 285 is related to the functional target identifier HA 2T. For example, the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T and the functional target identifier HA2T have a mathematical relationship KK91 therebetween; thereby, the electrical usage target 285 is related to the functional target identifier HA 2T.
The memory location XC92 is identified by memory address EC92 or is identified based on the memory address EC 92. The memory address EC92 is preset based on the electrical usage target identifier HZ 22; thereby, the electrical usage target 286 is associated with the functional target identifier HA 22. For example, the electrical usage target identifier HZ22 and the functional target identifier HA22 have a mathematical relationship KK92 therebetween; thereby, the electrical usage target 286 is associated with the functional target identifier HA 22.
In some embodiments, the triggering event EQ81 occurs against the electrical usage target 285 and causes the processing unit 230 to receive an operation request signal SZ 91. On the condition that the trigger event EQ81 occurs in dependence on the electrical usage target 285, the processing unit 230 obtains the measurement value VM81 and the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T in response to the operation request signal SZ91, and obtains the function target identifier HA2T based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ 2T. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to transmit at least one of the control signal SC81, the control signal SC82 and the control signal SC83 to the operation unit 397 based on the obtained functional target identifier HA 2T.
For example, the trigger event EQ81 is a user input event that the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU 91. The input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ91 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ81, which is the user input event. On the condition that the trigger event EQ81 occurs by means of the electrical usage target 285, the input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ91 to the processing unit 230 by means of the electrical usage target 285. The processing unit 230 provides a control signal SV81 to the control terminal 263C in response to the operation request signal SZ 91. For example, the control signal SV81 is a select control signal and functions to indicate the input 2631. The multiplexer 263 is responsive to the control signal SV81 to cause the third functional relationship between the input 2631 and the output 263P to be equal to the third conductive relationship.
On a condition that the third functional relationship is equal to the third on-relationship, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP1A to generate the sensing signal SM 81. The processing unit 230 receives the sense signal SM81 from the sense unit 260 and obtains the measurement value VM81 in the specified measurement value format HQ81 based on the received sense signal SM 81. For example, the electrical usage target 285 and the electrical usage target 286 are configured to correspond to the functional target 335 and the functional target 735, respectively, and are both coupled to the processing unit 230 and are located at different spatial locations, respectively.
In some embodiments, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JU91 for selecting the electrical usage target 285 to cause the trigger event EQ81 to occur. The input unit 270 generates the operation request signal SZ91 in response to the user input operation JU 91. The processing unit 230 receives the operation request signal SZ91, uses the sense signal SM81 to obtain the measurement value VM81 in response to the operation request signal SZ91, and performs the data acquisition AF9C to obtain the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T in response to the operation request signal SZ 91. For example, the storage unit 250 includes the storage space SS 11. The storage space SS11 HAs the preset nominal range threshold pair DC1A, the variable physical parameter range code UM8A, the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T, the electrical usage target identifier HZ22, the functional target identifier HA2T, the relative value VK81 and the relative value VK 82.
In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the memory address EC9T based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ2T, and to access the functional target identifier HA2T stored in the memory location XC9T based on the obtained memory address EC9T to obtain the functional target identifier HA 2T. On condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL at which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the mathematical relationship KA81 between the measured value VM81 and the measured value application range RM1L, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS81 based on the obtained function object identifier HA2T and the accessed control data code CK8T to cause the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC81, and to cause the output unit 240 to transmit the control signal SC81 to the operation unit 397.
For example, the control signal SC81 conveys the functional target identifier HA 2T. For example, the control signal SC81 delivers the functional object identifier HA2T and the measured value object range code EM 1T. The operation unit 397 is responsive to the control signal SC81 to obtain the measured value target range code EM1T and the functional target identifier HA2T from the control signal SC 81. In a third particular case, the operating unit 397 performs the signal generating operation BY81 using the output 338P to transmit a function signal SG81 to the function target 335 based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the obtained function target identifier HA 2T. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG81 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET.
In some embodiments, the operating unit 397 obtains the functional target identifier HA2T and the measurement value target range code EM1T from the control signal SC81 in response to the control signal SC81 under the condition that the control signal SC81 delivers the functional target identifier HA2T and the measurement value target range code EM1T, and provides a control signal SD81 to the control terminal 363C based on the obtained functional target identifier HA 2T. For example, the control signal SD81 is a selection control signal and functions to instruct the input 3631. The multiplexer 363 is responsive to the control signal SD81 to cause the first functional relationship between the input 3631 and the output 363P to be equal to the first conductive relationship. On a condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first conductive relationship, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a sensing signal SN 81.
The operation unit 397 receives the sense signal SN81 from the sense unit 334 and obtains a measurement value VN81 based on the received sense signal SN 81. In the third particular case, the operating unit 397 performs the signal generating operation BY81 using the output 338P to transmit the function signal SG81 to the function target 335 based on the obtained measurement value VN81, the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the obtained function target identifier HA 2T.
In some embodiments, the storage space SS11 further has a memory location PF 9T. The storage unit 250 stores the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ2T at the memory location PF 9T. The memory location PF9T is identified by memory address FF9T or is identified based on the memory address FF 9T. The memory address FF9T is preset. The electrical usage target 285 is coupled to the memory location PF9T by the processing unit 230. For example, the operation request signal SZ91 delivers input data DJ 91.
The data acquisition AF9C is one of a data acquisition operation AF95 and a data acquisition operation AF 96. The data fetch operation AF95 accesses the electrical usage target identifier HZ2T stored in the memory location PF9T by using the preset memory address PF2T to obtain the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ 2T. The data acquisition operation AF96 derives rules YU91 based on preset data to process the input data DJ91 to obtain the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ 2T.
In some embodiments, the input unit 270 causes the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SZ92 on the condition that the input unit 270 receives a trigger event of a user input operation JU92 for selecting the electrical usage target 286 occurs. The processing unit 230 obtains a measured value VM91 and the electric usage target identifier HZ22 in response to the operation request signal SZ92, and obtains the function target identifier HA22 based on the obtained electric usage target identifier HZ 22. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to transmit a control signal SC97 to the operating unit 397 based on the obtained measurement value VM91 and the obtained function target identifier HA 22. The control signal SC97 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A and to deliver the functional object identifier HA 22.
For example, the processing unit 230 provides a control signal SV82 to the control terminal 263C in response to the operation request signal SZ 92. For example, the control signal SV82 is a selection control signal, which functions to indicate the input 2632 and is different from the control signal SV 81. The multiplexer 263 is responsive to the control signal SV82 to cause the fourth functional relationship between the input 2632 and the output 263P to be equal to the fourth conductive relationship. On a condition that the fourth functional relationship is equal to the fourth conductive relationship, the sensing unit 260 senses the variable physical parameter QP2A to generate a sensing signal SM 91. The processing unit 230 receives the sense signal SM91 from the sensing unit 260 and obtains the measurement value VM91 based on the received sense signal SM 91.
In some embodiments, the operation unit 397 obtains the function target identifier HA22 from the control signal SC97 in response to the control signal SC97, and provides a control signal SD82 to the control terminal 363C based on the obtained function target identifier HA 22. For example, the control signal SD82 is a selection control signal and functions to instruct the input 3632. The multiplexer 363 is responsive to the control signal SD82 to cause the second functional relationship between the input 3632 and the output 363P to be equal to the second conductive relationship. On a condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second conductive relationship, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU2A to generate a sensing signal SN 91.
The operation unit 397 receives the sense signal SN91 from the sense unit 334 and obtains a measurement value VN91 based on the received sense signal SN 91. The operating unit 397 performs a signal generating operation BY97 using the output 338Q to transmit a function signal SG97 to the function target 735, based on the obtained measured value VN91 and the obtained function target identifier HA 22. The function signal SG97 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU 2A.
In some embodiments, the user interface area AP21 has the electrical usage target 285 and the electrical usage target 286. The user input operation JU91 is performed by the user 295. The electrical usage target 285 is one of a third sensing target and a third display target. The input component 440 includes the electrical usage target 285 on a condition that the electrical usage target 285 is the third sensing target. The display component 460 includes the electrical usage target 285 on a condition that the electrical usage target 285 is the third display target. For example, the third sensing target is a third button target. The third display target is a third icon target.
The electrical usage target 286 is one of a fourth sensing target and a fourth display target. On a condition that the electrical usage target 286 is the fourth sensing target, the input component 440 includes the electrical usage target 286. On a condition that the electrical usage target 286 is the fourth display target, the display component 460 includes the electrical usage target 286. For example, the fourth sensing target is a fourth button target. The third display target is a fourth icon target.
For example, under the condition that the electric usage target 285 is configured to be present in the input assembly 440, the electric usage target 285 receives the user input operation JU91 to cause the input assembly 440 to provide the operation request signal SZ91 to the processing unit 230. Under the condition that the electric usage target 285 is configured to be present in the display assembly 460, the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JU91 for selecting the electric usage target 285 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the operation request signal SZ91 to the processing unit 230. For example, the user input operation JU91 is configured to select the electrical usage target 285 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ 81. For example, the selection tool YJ81 is a cursor.
In some embodiments, the preset nominal range threshold pairs DC1A, the variable physical parameter range code UM8A, the relative value VK81 and the relative value VK82 are all further stored in the storage space SS11 based on the preset functional target identifier HA 2T. The processing unit 230 further uses the storage unit 250 to access any one of the preset nominal range threshold pairs DC1A, the variable physical parameter range codes UM8A, the relative value VK81 and the relative value VK82 based on the functional target identifier HA 2T.
The preset application range threshold pair DM1L, the preset control data code CK8T and the preset candidate range threshold pair DM1B are all further stored in the memory space SA1 based on the preset function target identifier HA 2T. The processing unit 230 further uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access any one of the preset application range threshold pair DM1L, the preset control data code CK8T, and the preset candidate range threshold pair DM1B based on the functional object identifier HA 2T.
The preset application range threshold pair DM1L and the preset candidate range threshold pair DM1B are both configured to belong to the measurement range limit data code type TM 81. The measurement range boundary data code type TM81 is identified by a measurement range boundary data code type identifier HM 81. The measurement range limit data code type identifier HM81 is preset. The preset control data code CK8T is configured to belong to a control data code type TK 81. The control data code type TK81 is identified by a control data code type identifier HK 81. The control data code type identifier HK81 is preset.
For example, the memory address FM8L is preset based on the preset function object identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HM 81. The processing unit 230 obtains the functional target identifier HA2T in response to the trigger event EQ 81. The data acquisition operation AF81 obtains the memory address FM8L on the basis of the obtained function target identifier HA2T, the determined measured value application range code EH1L and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HM81, and uses the memory cells 25Y1 to access the preset application range threshold pair DM1L stored in the memory location PM8L on the basis of the obtained memory address FM 8L.
For example, the memory address FV8L is preset based on the preset function object identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EH1L and the preset control data code type identifier HK 81. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL to which the variable physical parameter QP1A currently exists, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FV8L based on the obtained function object identifier HA2T, the determined measurement value application range code EH1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK81, and uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK8T stored in the memory location PV8L based on the obtained memory address FV 8L.
Please refer to fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 9051 of the control system 901 shown in fig. 1. As shown in fig. 42, the implementation structure 9051 includes the control device 212, the control-target device 130, and the server 280. The control device 212 is linked to the server 280. The control device 212 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control-target device 130 in dependence on the trigger event EQ81, and includes the operation unit 297 and the sensing unit 260. The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240. The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280.
In some embodiments, the operation unit 297 comprises a timer 545 coupled to the processing unit 230, and an electrical application target WJ11 coupled to the processing unit 230. The timer 545 is used to measure the clock time TH1A and is configured to comply with a timer specification FW 22. The timer 545 is controlled by the processing unit 230 to sense the clock time TH1A to generate a clock time signal SK 91.
Under the condition that the sense unit 260 is configured to be the same as the timer 545, the sense signal SM81 is configured to be the same as the clock time signal SK91, the sensor specification FQ11 is configured to be the same as the timer specification FW22, and the variable physical parameter QP1A is configured to be the same as the clock time TH 1A. The memory unit 25Y1 stores the control data code CK8T identical to the control information code CM 85. For example, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QP1A is configured to be the same as the clock time TH1A, the measurement value application range code EH1L is the same as the time value target range code EL 1T. The timer specification FW22 is preset.
The trigger event EQ81 is the user input event that the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JU 81. The user input operation JU81 is used to select the electrical application target WJ 11. The input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ81 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ 81. On condition that the user input event occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the clock time signal SK91 to obtain the measurement value VM81 in response to the operation request signal SZ 81. For example, the clock time signal SK91 delivers a specific count value NP91 in a specified count value format HQ 92. The specified measurement value format HQ92 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UX 92.
The processing unit 230 uses the clock time signal SK91 to obtain the measurement value VM81 equal to the specific count value NP 91. The processing unit 230, in response to the trigger event EQ81, executes the data determination AE8A to determine the measurement value application range code EH1L that is identical to the time value target range code EL 1T. On condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RC1EL at which the variable physical parameter QP1A is currently located by checking the mathematical relationship KA81 between the measured value VM81 and the measured value application range RM1L, the processing unit 230 obtains the control application code UA8T identical to the control information code CM85 from the memory unit 25Y1 based on the determined measured value application range code EH 1L. For example, under the condition that the sensing unit 260 is configured to be identical to the timer 545, the specified measurement value format HQ81 is configured to be identical to the specified count value format HQ 92.
For example, the control information code CM85 includes the preset time value target range code EL1T and the preset clock reference time value NR 81. The processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS81 for the trigger application function FB81 within the operating time TD81 based on the obtained control application code UA8T to cause the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC81 conveying the control data information CN 85. For example, the control data information CN85 includes the preset time value target range code EL1T and the preset clock reference time value NR 81. On condition that the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measured value target range code EM1T, the control signal SC81 functions to indicate the measured value target range RN1T by delivering the preset time value target range code EL 1T.
In some embodiments, the control-target device 130 includes the operation unit 397, the function unit 335, and the storage unit 332. The timer 342 included in the operation unit 397 is for measuring the clock time TH1A, and is configured to comply with the timer specification FT 21. The variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH 1A. The clock time TH1A is characterized based on a time target interval HR1 ET. The time target interval HR1ET is represented by a time value target range RQ 1T. The time value target range code EL1T is configured to indicate the time target interval HR1 ET.
The storage unit 332 has a memory location YS8T, and stores the physical parameter target range code UQ1T at the memory location YS 8T. The physical parameter target range code UQ1T represents the physical parameter target range RK1ET within which the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time target interval HR1ET, and is configured to be stored in the memory location YS8T based on the time-value target range code EL 1T. The memory location YS8T is identified based on memory address AS 8T. The memory address AS8T is preset based on the time value target range code EL 1T. The physical parameter target range RK1ET is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ….
In some embodiments, when the operating unit 397 receives the control signal SC81, the physical parameter target range code UQ1T is equal to the preset measured value target range code EM 1T. The control signal SC81 delivers the preset time value target range code EL 1T. The operating unit 397 obtains the conveyed time value target range code EL1T from the control signal SC81, obtains the memory address AS8T on the basis of the obtained time value target range code EL1T, and accesses the physical parameter target range code UQ1T stored in the memory location YS8T on the basis of the obtained memory address AS8T to obtain the preset measurement value target range code EM 1T.
The operation unit 397 performs the signal generating operation BY81 for the physical parameter control function FA81 to transmit the function signal SG81 to the function target 335 based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM 1T. The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG81 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to be within the physical parameter target range RD1 ET. The operating unit 397 obtains the delivered clock reference time value NR81 from the control signal SC81, causes the timer 342 to start within a start time TT82 based on the obtained clock reference time value NR81, and thereby causes the timer 342 to generate a clock time signal SY80 within the start time TT 82. The clock time signal SY80 is an initial time signal and delivers an initial count value NY80 in the specified count value format HH 95. For example, the initial count value NY80 is configured to be the same as the clock reference time value NR 81.
Many modifications and other embodiments of the disclosure set forth herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which this disclosure pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions and the associated drawings. Therefore, it is to be understood that the disclosure is not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims.
Description of the symbols
130: control target device
212: control device
220. 4452, a step of: reading device
230. 331: processing unit
240. 338: output unit
246: communication interface unit
250. 332: storage unit
25Y 1: memory unit
260. 334: sensing unit
261. 3341, 3342: sensing assembly
263. 363: multiplexer
2631. 2632, 3631, 3632: input terminal
263C, 363C: control terminal
263P, 363P, 338Q: output end
270. 337: input unit
275. 276, 285, 286: electric utility target
280: server
290: physical parameter forming unit
295: user's hand
297. 397: operating unit
310: identification medium
335. 735: functional object
3351: physical parameter forming part
3355: driving circuit
3371: first input assembly
3372: second input assembly
3373: third input assembly
3374. 440, 445: input assembly
3381. 3382, 3383, 450, 455: output assembly
339. 340, 342, 545: timer
350: electronic label
360: bar code medium
370: biological recognition medium
410: network
441: pointing device
4451: receiving assembly
460: display assembly
475: state change detector
70M: supporting medium
70U: material layer
734. 7341, 7342: sensor type
901: control system
9011. 9012, 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 9017, 9018, 9019, 9020, 9021, 9022, 9023, 9024, 9025, 9026, 9027, 9028, 9029, 9030, 9031, 9032, 9033, 9034, 9035, 9036, 9037, 9038, 9039, 9040, 9041, 9042, 9043, 9044, 9045, 9046, 9047, 9048, 9049, 9050, 9051: implementation structure
AC 1: response region
AD 81: first data acquisition operation
AD 82: second data acquisition operation
AD8A, AF8A, AF9C, AG 8A: data acquisition
AE81, AE 82: data determination operations
AE 8A: data determination
AF81, AF82, AF95, AF96, AG81, AG 82: data acquisition operations
AJ 11: physical parameter application area
AM82, AN81, AS81, AS82, AS8T, AX82, EC92, EC9T, FF9T, FM8L, FV 8L: memory address
AM 8T: first memory address
AP11, AP 21: user interface area
AT11, AT21, AU11, AU 21: physical parameter forming region
AX 8T: second memory address
BA83, BM85, BV85, ZP81, ZP85, ZQ 81: inspection operations
BC8T, BD81, BE 81: counting operation
BH82, ZH 81: specifying function operations
BJ 81: specifying actual operations
BM 81: second inspection operation
BQ81, JU81, JU91, JU92, JV81, JV82, JV 83: user input operation
BS81, BS91, BY81, BY85, BY91, BY 97: signal generation operation
BV 81: first inspection operation
BR 81: read operation
BZ81, ZM81, ZS 81: sensing operations
CA81, CA91, CE81, CE85, CE 8T: data comparison
CC12, CC 1T: control code
CD 81: first data comparison
CD 82: second data comparison
CG 81: control information
CK 8T: control data code
CM82, CM83, CM84, CM 85: control information code
CN82, CN83, CN84, CN 85: control data information
DA81, DX 85: code diversity
DC11, DC12, DD11, DD 12: rated range threshold
DC1A, DD 1A: nominal range threshold pair
DF 81: difference of first code
DH81, DJ81, DJ82, DJ83, DJ 91: inputting data
DM15, DM 16: application Range thresholds
DM1B, DN1B, DQ 1B: candidate range threshold pairs
DM 1L: applying range threshold pairs
DN13, DN14, DQ13, DQ 14: candidate range threshold
DN 17: first target Range threshold
DN 18: second target Range threshold
DN1T, DQ 1T: target Range threshold Pair
DQ17, DQ 18: target range threshold
DU 81: physical parameter data recording
DX 81: second code difference
DY 81: encoding data
EA81, EJ81, EJ82, EJ83, ZR81, ZR82, ZR83, ZR8KJ, ZR8TR, ZX84, ZX87, ZX8HE, ZX8HR, ZX8H2, ZX8HJ, ZX8HT, ZX8KJ, ZX8TR, ZX 92: data encoding operations
EB81, EH11, EM 11: code for reference range of measured value
EH 12: measured value reference range code, measured value candidate range code
EH14, EH17, EM 14: code for specifying measurement value range
EH 1L: code for measuring value application range
EL 11: time value reference range code
EL 1T: time value target range code
EL 12: time value reference range code, time value candidate range code
EM 12: measured value reference range code, measured value candidate range code
EM 13: measured value candidate range code
EM 1T: measured value target range code
EP 81: operating conditions
EQ 81: triggering event
EX 81: application environment
FA 81: physical parameter control function
FB 81: triggering application functions
FP81, FR 81: constraint condition
FQ11, FU 11: sensor specification
FT11, FT21, FW 22: timer specification
FY81, FZ 81: encoding images
GA812, GA8T 1: physical parameter representation
GA82, GA83, GA8T, GB 82: physical parameter candidate range representation
GA8E, GB 8E: nominal physical parameter range representation
GA8 HE: nominal time interval representation
GA8 HR: temporal reference interval representation
GA8H2, GA8 HT: temporal candidate interval representation
GA8 HJ: temporal length reference range representation
GA8KJ, GB8 KJ: representation of time length
GA8TR, GB8 TR: clock time representation
GAL 8: physical parameter control function specification
GB 8L: physical parameter application range representation
GBL 8: triggering application function specification
GJ 81: reference range of time length values
GQ81, GW 81: sensor sensitivity representation
GQ8R, GW 8R: sensor measurement range representation
GS81, GY81, GY 91: signal generation control
GT81, GU 81: ensuring operation
HA 0T: control device identifier
HA22, HA 2T: functional object identifier
HC 81: control code type identifier
HE81, HE82, HF81, HF 82: sensing signal generation
HH81, HQ 81: specifying measurement value formats
HH91, HH95, HQ 92: specifying count value format
HJ 81: time length reference range
HK 81: control data code type identifier
HM 81: code type identifier for measuring range limit data
HR1E 1: time reference interval
HR1 ET: time target interval
HR1E 2: time reference interval, time candidate interval
HZ22, HZ 2T: electric utility target identifier
JA1A, JB1A, QG1A, QL1A, QP1A, QP2A, QU1A, QY 1A: variable physical parameters
JN 81: sequence of measured values
KA81, KA91, KM85, KK91, KK92, KQ81, KV83, KV85, KY 81: mathematical relationship
KH 81: physical parameter relationship
KJ 81: numerical relationship
KM 81: second mathematical relationship
KP81, KP 85: arithmetic relation
KV 81: first mathematical relationship
KV 91: third mathematical relationship
LA81, LA 82: status indication
LB 81: first state indication
LB 82: second state indication
LC81, LD 81: actual position
LF 8A: variable length of time
LJ 8T: length of reference time
LN 8A: time length range threshold value pair
LN81, LN 82: time length range threshold
LP81, SP 81: electrical signals
LQ81, SQ 81: optical signal
LT 8T: length of application time
LY 81: measurement information
MF81, MF83, MG81, MK81, MK85, MQ81, MU81, MZ 81: scientific calculation
ND8A, NF 8A: data acquisition program
NE 8A: data determination program
NP91, NY 81: specific count value
NR 81: clock reference time value
NS81, NT 81: number of total reference ranges
NY 80: initial count value
NY 8A: variable counter value
PB 81: first logic determination
PB 91: second logic decision
PE 81: second logic decision
PF9T, PM8L, PV8L, XC9T, XC92, YM82, YM8T, YN81, YS81, YS82, YS8T, YX 82: memory location
PH81, PH 91: logic determination
PW 81: making a rational decision
QB 81: presetting a time reference interval sequence
QD12, QD 1T: specifying physical parameters
QP 15: specific physical parameters
QU 17: a first specific physical parameter
QU 18: second specific physical parameter
QU 15: third specific physical parameter
RA8E, RB 8E: sensor measuring range
RC1E, RD 1E: range of rated physical parameter
RC1E1, RD1E 1: reference range of physical parameter
RC1E 2: reference range of physical parameter, candidate range of physical parameter
RC1E3, RD1E3, RD2E2, RK1E 2: physical parameter candidate ranges
RC1E4, RC1E7, RD1E 4: range of specific physical parameters
RC1 EL: application scope of physical parameters
RC1N, RD 1N: nominal measurement value range
RD1E 2: reference range of physical parameter, candidate range of physical parameter
RD1ET, RK1 ET: target range of physical parameter
RL 81: positive operation report
RM11, RN 11: reference range of measured values
RM 12: reference range of measured value, candidate range of measured value
RM 17: specific measurement value range
RM 1L: range of application of measured value
RN 12: reference range of measured value, candidate range of measured value
RN 13: candidate range of measured value
RN 1T: target range of measured values
RQ 11: reference range of time value
RQ 1T: target range of time values
RQ 12: time value reference range, time value candidate range
RW1EL, RY1 ET: corresponding to the range of physical parameters
RX 1T: corresponding to the range of measured values
SA 1: memory space
SB 81: physical parameter signal
SC81, SC82, SC83, SC97, SD81, SD82, SF81, SF97, SV81, SV 82: control signal
SE 81: control response signal
SG81, SG82, SG85, SG91, SG 97: function signal
SK91, SY80, SY 81: clock time signal
SL 81: drive signal
SM81, SM82, SM91, SN83, SN 91: sensing signal
SN 81: a first sensing signal
SN 82: the second sensing signal
SN811, SN 812: sensing signal components
SS11, SU 11: storage space
SW82, SW83, SW84, SW 85: instruction signal
SX 81: trigger signal
SZ81, SZ91, SZ 92: operation request signal
TD81, TF81, TF 82: time of operation
TE82, TG82, TG83, TW81, TY 81: specifying time
TH 1A: time of clock
TJ 8T: at a specific time
TK 81: control data code type
TL11, TP11, TU11, TU 1G: type of physical parameter
TM 81: code type of measuring range limit data
TR 81: time of reference of clock
TT 81: time of triggering
TT 82: starting time
TZ 8T: end time
UA 8T: control application code
UH 8T: interrupt request signal
UL 81: presetting characteristic physical parameters
UM8A, UN 8A: variable physical parameter range code
UM 8L: physical parameter application range code
UN8T, UQ 1T: physical parameter target range code
UQ 11: physical parameter specified range code
UQ 12: physical parameter specified range code and physical parameter candidate range code
UW 81: specific input code
UX81, UX92, UY81, UY91, UY 95: specifying the number of bits
VA11, VC11, VK81, VK 82: relative value
VG 81: allowable value
VM81, VM82, VM91, VN83, VN 91: measured value
VN 81: first measured value
VN 82: second measured value
WA8L, WB8L, WD81, WS82, WS 8T: write request information
WC 8T: second write request information
WJ 11: electrical application target
WN 8T: first write request information
XA 8A: variable physical state
XA 81: non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state
XA 82: actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state
XH81, XH 82: specific state
XJ 81: a first specific state
XJ 82: a second specific state
XK 81: operation reference data code
XP 81: specific empirical formula
YJ 81: selection tool
YM 8T: a first memory location
YQ81, YW 81: sensitivity of sensor
YU 91: preset data export rules
YX 8T: second memory location
ZB 81: relative reference range code
ZD1T1, ZD1T 2: presetting physical parameter target range limit
ZL 82: characteristic physical parameter arrival
ZU 81: verifying operations
ZX 81: first data encoding operation
ZX 82: second data encoding operation
ZX 83: fourth data encoding operation, data encoding operation
ZX 91: third data encoding operation

Claims (12)

1.一种控制目标装置，包含：1. A control target device, comprising: 可变物理参数，基于由测量值目标范围所代表的物理参数目标范围和对应于所述物理参数目标范围的对应物理参数范围而被特征化；a variable physical parameter characterized based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measurement value target range and a corresponding physical parameter range corresponding to the physical parameter target range; 感测单元，感测所述可变物理参数以生成第一感测信号；以及a sensing unit that senses the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal; and 操作单元，耦合于所述感测单元，在所述操作单元接收起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用的控制信号的条件下响应所述第一感测信号来获得第一测量值，响应所述控制信号来执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述测量值目标范围之间的第一数学关系的第一检查操作，并在所述操作单元基于所述第一检查操作而确定所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述对应物理参数范围的条件下导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围。an operating unit, coupled to the sensing unit, and responding to the first sensing signal to obtain a first measured value in response to the first sensing signal under the condition that the operating unit receives a control signal that functions to indicate the target range of the measured value, and responds the control signal to perform a first check operation for checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value and the target range of the measurement value, and is determined at the operation unit based on the first check operation The condition of the corresponding physical parameter range that the variable physical parameter is currently in causes the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range. 2.根据权利要求1所述的控制目标装置，其中：2. The control target device according to claim 1, wherein: 所述感测单元被配置以符合与所述测量值目标范围相关的传感器规格，其中所述传感器规格包含用于表示传感器灵敏度的传感器灵敏度表示，且所述传感器灵敏度相关于由所述感测单元所执行的感测信号生成；The sensing unit is configured to comply with a sensor specification associated with the target range of measurements, wherein the sensor specification includes a sensor sensitivity representation representing a sensor sensitivity relative to the sensor sensitivity determined by the sensing unit the sensed signal generation performed; 所述第一测量值以指定测量值格式而被获得；the first measurement is obtained in a specified measurement format; 所述测量值目标范围具有目标范围阈值对；the measurement target range has target range threshold pairs; 所述对应物理参数范围由对应测量值范围所代表；The corresponding physical parameter range is represented by the corresponding measurement value range; 所述测量值目标范围和所述对应测量值范围的范围组合等于额定测量值范围，其中所述测量值目标范围、所述对应物理参数范围和所述额定测量值范围皆基于所述传感器灵敏度表示来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设，且所述额定测量值范围具有额定范围阈值对；The range combination of the measurement value target range and the corresponding measurement value range is equal to the nominal measurement value range, wherein the measurement value target range, the corresponding physical parameter range and the nominal measurement value range are all expressed based on the sensor sensitivity to be preset with the specified measurement format, and the nominal measurement range has nominal range threshold pairs; 所述控制信号输送所述目标范围阈值对、所述额定范围阈值对和控制码，其中所述控制码基于在所述物理参数目标范围之内的指定物理参数而被预设，且所述控制信号通过输送所述目标范围阈值对来起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用；The control signal conveys the target range threshold pair, the rated range threshold pair, and a control code, wherein the control code is preset based on a specified physical parameter within the physical parameter target range, and the control a signal that serves to indicate the target range of measurements by conveying the target range threshold pair; 所述操作单元从所述控制信号获得所述目标范围阈值对，并通过比较所述第一测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对来执行所述第一检查操作；the operation unit obtains the target range threshold pair from the control signal, and performs the first checking operation by comparing the first measurement value with the obtained target range threshold pair; 所述操作单元基于所述第一检查操作来做出所述第一测量值是否为于所述对应测量值范围之内的第一逻辑决定，并在所述第一逻辑决定是肯定的条件下确定所述对应物理参数范围；The operating unit makes a first logical decision whether the first measurement value is within the corresponding measurement value range based on the first checking operation, and under the condition that the first logical decision is positive determining the corresponding physical parameter range; 所述操作单元从所述控制信号获得所述额定范围阈值对，并通过比较所述第一测量值和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对来执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述额定测量值范围之间的第二数学关系的第二检查操作；The operating unit obtains the pair of nominal range threshold values from the control signal, and performs an operation for checking the first measured value and the pair of nominal range threshold values obtained by comparing the first measured value a second check operation of a second mathematical relationship between nominal measured value ranges; 所述操作单元进一步基于所述第二检查操作来做出所述第一逻辑决定；The operating unit further makes the first logical decision based on the second checking operation; 所述操作单元从所述控制信号获得所述控制码，并在所述操作单元确定所述对应物理参数范围的条件下基于所获得的所述控制码来执行信号生成控制以生成用于导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围的功能信号；The operation unit obtains the control code from the control signal, and performs signal generation control based on the obtained control code under the condition that the operation unit determines the corresponding physical parameter range to generate a control code for causing the corresponding physical parameter range. a function signal that the variable physical parameter enters the target range of the physical parameter; 在所述操作单元于操作时间之内执行所述信号生成控制之后，所述感测单元感测所述可变物理参数以生成第二感测信号；After the operation unit performs the signal generation control within an operation time, the sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter to generate a second sensing signal; 所述操作单元于所述操作时间之后的指定时间之内响应所述第二感测信号来以所述指定测量值格式获得第二测量值；the operation unit obtains a second measurement value in the specified measurement value format in response to the second sensing signal within a specified time after the operation time; 在所述操作单元于所述指定时间之内通过比较所述第二测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对来确定所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述物理参数目标范围的条件下，所述操作单元执行确保操作，所述确保操作用于导致代表所确定的所述物理参数目标范围的物理参数目标范围码被记录；under the condition that the operating unit determines the target range of the physical parameter that the variable physical parameter is currently in by comparing the second measurement value and the obtained pair of the target range threshold within the specified time , the operation unit executes a ensuring operation for causing a physical parameter target range code representing the determined physical parameter target range to be recorded; 所述可变物理参数相关于可变时间长度，其中所述操作单元用于测量所述可变时间长度，所述可变时间长度基于时间长度参考范围和参考时间长度而被特征化，所述时间长度参考范围由时间长度值参考范围所代表，且所述参考时间长度由时间长度值所代表；The variable physical parameter is related to a variable time length, wherein the operating unit is used to measure the variable time length, the variable time length being characterized based on a time length reference range and a reference time length, the a duration reference range is represented by a duration value reference range, and the reference duration is represented by a duration value; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述时间长度值；the control signal further conveys the time length value; 所述操作单元被配置以从所述控制信号获得所述时间长度值，并检查所获得的所述时间长度值和所述时间长度值参考范围之间的数值关系以做出用于控制特定时间的计数操作是否要被执行的第二逻辑决定；以及The operation unit is configured to obtain the time length value from the control signal, and to check a numerical relationship between the obtained time length value and the time length value reference range to make a decision for controlling a specific time. a second logical decision of whether the count operation is to be performed; and 在所述第二逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，所述操作单元基于所获得的所述时间长度值来执行所述计数操作，在所述可变物理参数由于所述控制信号而被配置以于所述物理参数目标范围之内的条件下基于所述计数操作来到达所述特定时间，并在所述特定时间之内执行用于导致所述可变物理参数离开所述物理参数目标范围以进入所述对应物理参数范围的信号生成操作。The operation unit performs the counting operation based on the obtained time length value under the condition that the second logical decision is affirmative, where the variable physical parameter is configured due to the control signal to reaching the specific time based on the counting operation under conditions within the physical parameter target range, and executing within the specific time for causing the variable physical parameter to leave the physical parameter target range to enter The signal generation operation corresponding to the physical parameter range. 3.根据权利要求1所述的控制目标装置，其中：3. The control target device according to claim 1, wherein: 所述操作单元被配置以执行与所述物理参数目标范围相关的物理参数控制功能，并包含耦合于所述感测单元的处理单元、耦合于所述处理单元的输入单元、和耦合于所述处理单元的输出单元；The operating unit is configured to perform physical parameter control functions related to the physical parameter target range, and includes a processing unit coupled to the sensing unit, an input unit coupled to the processing unit, and an input unit coupled to the processing unit the output unit of the processing unit; 所述物理参数控制功能被配置以符合与所述物理参数目标范围相关的物理参数控制功能规格；the physical parameter control function is configured to conform to a physical parameter control function specification associated with the physical parameter target range; 所述感测单元被配置以符合与所述测量值目标范围相关的传感器规格，其中所述传感器规格包含用于表示传感器灵敏度的传感器灵敏度表示，且所述传感器灵敏度相关于由所述感测单元所执行的感测信号生成；The sensing unit is configured to comply with a sensor specification associated with the target range of measurements, wherein the sensor specification includes a sensor sensitivity representation representing a sensor sensitivity relative to the sensor sensitivity determined by the sensing unit the sensed signal generation performed; 在所述输入单元从控制装置接收所述控制信号的条件下，所述处理单元响应所述第一感测信号来以指定测量值格式获得所述第一测量值，其中所述指定测量值格式基于指定比特数目而被特征化；On condition that the input unit receives the control signal from the control device, the processing unit is responsive to the first sensing signal to obtain the first measurement value in a specified measurement value format, wherein the specified measurement value format is characterized based on a specified number of bits; 所述控制目标装置进一步包含耦合于所述输出单元的功能目标、和耦合于所述处理单元的储存单元；The control target device further includes a functional target coupled to the output unit, and a storage unit coupled to the processing unit; 所述对应物理参数范围由对应测量值范围所代表；The corresponding physical parameter range is represented by the corresponding measurement value range; 所述物理参数目标范围和所述对应物理参数范围的范围组合等于额定物理参数范围；The range combination of the physical parameter target range and the corresponding physical parameter range is equal to the rated physical parameter range; 所述物理参数控制功能规格包含所述传感器规格、用于表示所述额定物理参数范围的额定物理参数范围表示、和用于表示所述物理参数目标范围的物理参数候选范围表示；The physical parameter control function specification includes the sensor specification, a nominal physical parameter range representation representing the nominal physical parameter range, and a physical parameter candidate range representation representing the physical parameter target range; 所述测量值目标范围和所述对应测量值范围的范围组合等于额定测量值范围；The range combination of the target range of measurement values and the corresponding range of measurement values is equal to the nominal measurement value range; 所述额定测量值范围代表所述额定物理参数范围，基于所述额定物理参数范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述额定物理参数范围表示的第一数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设，并具有额定范围阈值对，其中所述额定范围阈值对用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；The nominal measurement value range represents the nominal physical parameter range for use with the designation based on the nominal physical parameter range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a first data encoding operation for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation measurement value format is preset, and has nominal range threshold value pairs, wherein the nominal range threshold value value pair is preset with the specified measurement value value format; 所述测量值目标范围由测量值目标范围码所代表，并具有目标范围阈值对，其中所述测量值目标范围码基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；the measurement target range is represented by a measurement target range code with target range threshold pairs, wherein the measurement target range code is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述目标范围阈值对包含第一目标范围阈值和相对于所述第一目标范围阈值的第二目标范围阈值，并基于所述物理参数候选范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述物理参数候选范围表示的第二数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；The target range threshold pair includes a first target range threshold and a second target range threshold relative to the first target range threshold, and is based on the physical parameter candidate range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a method for converting the the second data encoding operation represented by the physical parameter candidate range is preset with the specified measurement value format; 所述控制信号通过输送所述测量值目标范围码来起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用；The control signal serves to indicate the target range of the measurement value by conveying the target range code of the measurement value; 所述物理参数控制功能规格进一步包含物理参数表示，所述物理参数表示用于表示在所述物理参数目标范围之内的指定物理参数；The physical parameter control function specification further includes a physical parameter representation for representing a specified physical parameter within a target range of the physical parameter; 所述储存单元储存所述额定范围阈值对，具有第一存储器位置和不同于所述第一存储器位置的第二存储器位置，在所述第一存储器位置储存所述目标范围阈值对，并在所述第二存储器位置储存控制码，其中：The storage unit stores the nominal range threshold pair, has a first memory location and a second memory location different from the first memory location, stores the target range threshold pair at the first memory location, and stores the target range threshold pair at the first memory location. The second memory location stores the control code, wherein: 所述第一存储器位置和所述第二存储器位置皆基于所述测量值目标范围码而被识别；以及The first memory location and the second memory location are both identified based on the measurement target range code; and 所述控制码基于所述物理参数表示和用于转换所述物理参数表示的第三数据编码操作而被预设；the control code is preset based on the physical parameter representation and a third data encoding operation for converting the physical parameter representation; 所述功能目标具有所述可变物理参数，其中所述感测单元耦合于所述功能目标；the functional target has the variable physical parameter, wherein the sensing unit is coupled to the functional target; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述额定范围阈值对；the control signal further conveys the nominal range threshold pair; 所述处理单元响应所述控制信号来从所述控制信号和所述储存单元的其中之一获得所述额定范围阈值对，响应所述控制信号来从所述控制信号获得所述测量值目标范围码，并通过运行数据获取程序来执行使用所获得的所述测量值目标范围码的数据获取以获得所述目标范围阈值对，其中所述数据获取是第一数据获取操作和第二数据获取操作的其中之一，且所述数据获取程序基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被构建；the processing unit obtains the nominal range threshold pair from one of the control signal and the storage unit in response to the control signal, and obtains the measurement target range from the control signal in response to the control signal code, and perform data acquisition using the obtained measurement target range code to obtain the target range threshold pair by running a data acquisition program, wherein the data acquisition is a first data acquisition operation and a second data acquisition operation one of, and the data acquisition program is constructed based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述第一数据获取操作基于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码来使用所述储存单元以存取被储存在所述第一存储器位置的所述目标范围阈值对以获得所述目标范围阈值对；The first data acquisition operation uses the storage unit to access the pair of target range thresholds stored in the first memory location to obtain the target range threshold based on the obtained measurement target range code right; 所述第二数据获取操作通过执行使用所获得的所述测量值目标范围码和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对的科学计算来获得所述目标范围阈值对；The second data acquisition operation obtains the target range threshold pair by performing a scientific calculation using the obtained measurement value target range code and the obtained nominal range threshold pair; 所述处理单元基于所述第一测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对之间的第一数据比较来执行所述第一检查操作，基于所述第一检查操作来做出所述第一测量值是否为于所述对应测量值范围之内的第一逻辑决定，并在所述第一逻辑决定是肯定的条件下确定所述对应物理参数范围；The processing unit performs the first checking operation based on the first data comparison between the first measurement value and the obtained pair of target range thresholds, and makes the first checking operation based on the first checking operation. Whether a measured value is within the range of the corresponding measured value is a first logical decision, and the corresponding physical parameter range is determined under the condition that the first logical decision is positive; 在所述处理单元确定所述对应物理参数范围的条件下，所述处理单元基于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码来使用所述储存单元以存取被储存在所述第二存储器位置的所述控制码，并基于所存取的所述控制码来执行用于所述物理参数控制功能的信号生成控制以控制所述输出单元；以及Provided that the processing unit determines the corresponding physical parameter range, the processing unit uses the storage unit to access the data stored in the second memory location based on the obtained measurement value target range code the control code and, based on the accessed control code, perform signal generation control for the physical parameter control function to control the output unit; and 所述输出单元响应所述信号生成控制来执行用于所述物理参数控制功能的信号生成操作以生成功能信号，所述功能信号用于控制所述功能目标以导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围。The output unit performs a signal generation operation for the physical parameter control function in response to the signal generation control to generate a function signal for controlling the function target to cause the variable physical parameter to enter all Describe the target range of physical parameters. 4.根据权利要求3所述的控制目标装置，其中：4. The control target device according to claim 3, wherein: 所述控制装置是外部装置；the control device is an external device; 所述处理单元通过所述输出单元来使所述功能目标执行与所述可变物理参数相关的指定功能操作，其中所述指定功能操作用于导致触发事件发生，且所述控制装置响应所述触发事件来输出所述控制信号；The processing unit causes the functional object to perform a specified functional operation related to the variable physical parameter through the output unit, wherein the specified functional operation is used to cause a trigger event to occur, and the control device responds to the triggering an event to output the control signal; 所述额定测量值范围被配置以具有复数不同测量值参考范围，其中所述复数不同测量值参考范围具有总参考范围数目，分别由复数不同测量值参考范围码所代表，并包含所述测量值目标范围；The nominal measurement value range is configured to have a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges, wherein the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges have a total number of reference ranges, each represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference range codes, and containing the measurement values target range; 所述总参考范围数目基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；the total reference range number is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述复数不同测量值参考范围码包含所预设的所述测量值目标范围码，并皆基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；The plurality of different measurement value reference range codes include the preset measurement value target range codes, and are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述总参考范围数目；the control signal further conveys the total reference range number; 所述处理单元响应所述控制信号来从所述控制信号和所述储存单元的其中之一获得所述总参考范围数目；the processing unit obtains the total reference range number from one of the control signal and the storage unit in response to the control signal; 所述科学计算进一步使用所获得的所述总参考范围数目；The scientific calculation further uses the obtained total reference range number; 所述功能目标响应所述功能信号来将所述可变物理参数从第一特定物理参数改变成第二特定物理参数，其中所述第一特定物理参数是于所述对应物理参数范围之内，且所述第二特定物理参数是于所述物理参数目标范围之内；the functional target is responsive to the functional signal to change the variable physical parameter from a first specific physical parameter to a second specific physical parameter, wherein the first specific physical parameter is within the corresponding physical parameter range, and the second specific physical parameter is within the target range of the physical parameter; 所述物理参数控制功能规格进一步包含用于表示所述对应物理参数范围的对应物理参数范围表示；The physical parameter control function specification further includes a corresponding physical parameter range representation for representing the corresponding physical parameter range; 所述对应测量值范围基于所述对应物理参数范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述对应物理参数范围表示的第四数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；the corresponding measurement value ranges are preset with the specified measurement value format based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a fourth data encoding operation for converting the corresponding physical parameter range representation; 所述可变物理参数进一步基于所述额定物理参数范围而被特征化；the variable physical parameter is further characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range; 所述额定物理参数范围包含复数不同物理参数参考范围，其中所述复数不同物理参数参考范围包含所述物理参数目标范围；the nominal physical parameter range includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges, wherein the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges include the physical parameter target range; 所述测量值目标范围是所述额定测量值范围的第一部分；the target range of measurements is a first portion of the nominal range of measurements; 所述对应测量值范围是所述额定测量值范围的第二部分，相邻于所述测量值目标范围，并互补于所述测量值目标范围；the corresponding measurement value range is a second portion of the nominal measurement value range, adjacent to the measurement value target range and complementary to the measurement value target range; 所述处理单元基于所述第一测量值和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对之间的第二数据比较来执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述额定测量值范围之间的第二数学关系的第二检查操作；The processing unit performs a first step for checking between the first measured value and the nominal measured value range based on a second data comparison between the first measured value and the obtained nominal range threshold pair. The second check operation of the mathematical relationship; 所述处理单元进一步基于所述第二检查操作来做出所述第一逻辑决定；The processing unit makes the first logical decision further based on the second checking operation; 在所述处理单元于操作时间之内执行所述信号生成控制之后，所述感测单元感测所述可变物理参数以生成第二感测信号；The sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter to generate a second sensing signal after the processing unit performs the signal generation control within an operating time; 所述处理单元于所述操作时间之后的指定时间之内响应所述第二感测信号来以所述指定测量值格式获得第二测量值；the processing unit obtains a second measurement value in the specified measurement value format in response to the second sensing signal within a specified time after the operation time; 所述处理单元通过比较所述第二测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对来检查所述第二测量值和所述测量值目标范围之间的第三数学关系以做出所述第二测量值是否为于所述测量值目标范围之内的第二逻辑决定；The processing unit checks a third mathematical relationship between the second measurement value and the target range of measurement values by comparing the second measurement value and the obtained target range threshold pair to make the first measurement. 2. a second logical determination of whether the measured value is within the target range of the measured value; 在所述第二逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，所述处理单元于所述指定时间之内确定所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述物理参数目标范围，生成肯定操作报告，并导致所述输出单元输出输送所述肯定操作报告的控制回应信号，藉此所述控制回应信号用于导致所述控制装置获得所述肯定操作报告，其中所述肯定操作报告表示所述可变物理参数成功地进入所述物理参数目标范围的操作情况；Under the condition that the second logical decision is affirmative, the processing unit determines, within the specified time, the physical parameter target range that the variable physical parameter is currently in, generates a positive operation report, and causes the The output unit outputs a control response signal conveying the positive operation report, whereby the control response signal is used to cause the control device to obtain the positive operation report, wherein the positive operation report indicates that the variable physical parameter successfully Operational conditions entering the target range of said physical parameters; 所述储存单元进一步储存可变物理参数范围码；The storage unit further stores a variable physical parameter range code; 当所述输入单元接收所述控制信号时，所述可变物理参数范围码等于选择自所述复数不同测量值参考范围码的特定测量值范围码，其中所述特定测量值范围码指示基于感测操作而被先前确定的特定物理参数范围，所述特定物理参数范围选择自所述复数不同物理参数参考范围，且由所述感测单元所执行的所述感测操作用于感测所述可变物理参数；When the input unit receives the control signal, the variable physical parameter range code is equal to a specific measurement value range code selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes, wherein the specific measurement value range code indicates a sensor based range code a specific physical parameter range previously determined for a sensing operation, the specific physical parameter range is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges, and the sensing operation performed by the sensing unit is used to sense the Variable physical parameters; 在所述输入单元接收所述控制信号之前，所述特定测量值范围码被指定到所述可变物理参数范围码；The specific measurement value range code is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code before the input unit receives the control signal; 在所述特定测量值范围码不同于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码且所述处理单元通过做出所述第二逻辑决定而确定所述物理参数目标范围的条件下，所述处理单元基于等于所述特定测量值范围码的所述可变物理参数范围码和所获得的所述测量值目标范围码之间的第一码差异来使用所述储存单元以将所获得的所述测量值目标范围码指定到所述可变物理参数范围码；The processing unit determines the physical parameter target range by making the second logical decision under the condition that the specific measurement value range code is different from the obtained measurement value target range code The storage unit is used to store the obtained measurement based on a first code difference between the variable physical parameter range code equal to the specific measurement range code and the obtained measurement target range code a value target range code assigned to the variable physical parameter range code; 当所述输入单元接收所述控制信号时，所述输出单元显示第一状态指示，其中所述第一状态指示用于指示所述可变物理参数被配置于所述特定物理参数范围之内的第一特定状态；When the input unit receives the control signal, the output unit displays a first state indication, wherein the first state indication is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter is configured within the specific physical parameter range the first specific state; 在所述特定测量值范围码不同于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码且所述处理单元通过做出所述第二逻辑决定而确定所述物理参数目标范围的条件下，所述处理单元进一步基于所述第一码差异来导致所述输出单元将所述第一状态指示改变成第二状态指示，其中所述第二状态指示用于指示所述可变物理参数被配置于所述物理参数目标范围之内的第二特定状态；The processing unit determines the physical parameter target range by making the second logical decision under the condition that the specific measurement value range code is different from the obtained measurement value target range code further causing the output unit to change the first state indication to a second state indication based on the first code difference, wherein the second state indication is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter is configured in the physical a second specific state within the parameter target range; 所述控制信号是电信号和光信号的其中之一；the control signal is one of an electrical signal and an optical signal; 所述输入单元包含：The input unit includes: 第一输入组件，耦合于所述处理单元，并在所述控制信号是所述电信号的条件下，通过接收输送控制信息的所述电信号来导致所述处理单元获得所述控制信息，其中所述控制信息包含所述测量值目标范围码；a first input component coupled to the processing unit and causing the processing unit to obtain the control information by receiving the electrical signal conveying the control information, provided the control signal is the electrical signal, wherein the control information includes the measurement value target range code; 第二输入组件，耦合于所述处理单元，并在所述控制信号是所述光信号的条件下接收输送编码影像的所述光信号，其中所述编码影像代表所述控制信息；以及a second input component coupled to the processing unit and receiving the optical signal conveying an encoded image under the condition that the control signal is the optical signal, wherein the encoded image represents the control information; and 第三输入组件，耦合于所述处理单元，在所述可变物理参数由于所述控制信号而被配置于所述物理参数目标范围之内的条件下接收使用者输入操作，并响应所述使用者输入操作来导致所述处理单元确定特定输入码，其中所述特定输入码选择自所述复数不同测量值参考范围码；A third input component, coupled to the processing unit, receives a user input operation under the condition that the variable physical parameter is configured within the target range of the physical parameter due to the control signal, and responds to the use an input operation to cause the processing unit to determine a specific input code, wherein the specific input code is selected from the plurality of distinct measurement value reference range codes; 在所述控制信号是所述光信号的条件下，所述第二输入组件感测所述编码影像以确定编码数据，并解码所述编码数据以提供所述控制信息到所述处理单元；under the condition that the control signal is the optical signal, the second input component senses the encoded image to determine encoded data, and decodes the encoded data to provide the control information to the processing unit; 在所述特定输入码不同于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码的条件下，所述处理单元基于等于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码的所述可变物理参数范围码和所述特定输入码之间的第二码差异来通过所述输出单元而导致所述可变物理参数离开所述物理参数目标范围以进入所述对应物理参数范围；Under the condition that the specific input code is different from the preset measurement value target range code, the processing unit is based on the variable physical parameter range code equal to the obtained measurement value target range code and the obtained measurement value target range code a second code difference between the particular input codes to cause the variable physical parameter to leave the physical parameter target range through the output unit to enter the corresponding physical parameter range; 所述感测单元感测处于拘束条件的所述可变物理参数以提供所述第一感测信号到所述处理单元，其中所述拘束条件是所述可变物理参数等于包含于所述额定物理参数范围中的第三特定物理参数；The sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter under a restraint condition to provide the first sensed signal to the processing unit, wherein the restraint condition is that the variable physical parameter is equal to a value contained in the nominal a third specific physical parameter in the physical parameter range; 所述处理单元基于所述第一感测信号来估计所述第三特定物理参数以获得所述第一测量值；the processing unit estimates the third specific physical parameter based on the first sensing signal to obtain the first measurement value; 在处理单元基于所述第一数据比较和所述第二数据比较而辨识所述第一测量值为于所述测量值目标范围之外并于所述额定测量值范围之内的可允许值的条件下，所述处理单元做出所述第一逻辑决定以成为肯定的；When the processing unit identifies the first measurement value as an allowable value outside the measurement value target range and within the rated measurement value range based on the first data comparison and the second data comparison condition, the processing unit makes the first logical decision to be affirmative; 在所述输入单元接收所述控制信号之前，所述输入单元接收包含所预设的所述目标范围阈值对和第一存储器位址的第一写入请求信息，其中所述第一存储器位置基于所述第一存储器位址而被识别，且所述第一存储器位址基于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码而被预设；Before the input unit receives the control signal, the input unit receives first write request information including a preset pair of the target range threshold and a first memory address, wherein the first memory location is based on the first memory address is identified, and the first memory address is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code; 所述处理单元响应所述第一写入请求信息来使用所述储存单元以将所述第一写入请求信息的所述目标范围阈值对储存到所述第一存储器位置；the processing unit uses the storage unit to store the target range threshold pair of the first write request information to the first memory location in response to the first write request information; 在所述输入单元接收所述控制信号之前，所述输入单元接收包含所预设的所述控制码和第二存储器位址的第二写入请求信息，其中所述第二存储器位置基于所述第二存储器位址而被识别，且所述第二存储器位址基于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码而被预设；以及Before the input unit receives the control signal, the input unit receives second write request information including the preset control code and a second memory address, wherein the second memory location is based on the A second memory address is identified, and the second memory address is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code; and 所述处理单元响应所述第二写入请求信息来使用所述储存单元以将所述第二写入请求信息的所述控制码储存到所述第二存储器位置。The processing unit uses the storage unit to store the control code of the second write request information to the second memory location in response to the second write request information. 5.一种用于通过生成功能信号而控制可变物理参数的方法，其中所述可变物理参数基于由测量值目标范围所代表的物理参数目标范围和对应于所述物理参数目标范围的对应物理参数范围而被特征化，所述方法包含下列步骤：5. A method for controlling a variable physical parameter by generating a functional signal, wherein the variable physical parameter is based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measurement value target range and a correspondence corresponding to the physical parameter target range The physical parameter range is characterized, and the method includes the following steps: 感测所述可变物理参数以生成第一感测信号；sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensed signal; 在起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用的控制信号被接收的条件下，响应所述第一感测信号来获得第一测量值；obtaining a first measurement in response to the first sensed signal under a condition that a control signal serving to indicate the target range of the measurement is received; 响应所述控制信号，执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述测量值目标范围之间的第一数学关系的第一检查操作；以及responsive to the control signal, performing a first checking operation for checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement and the target range of measurements; and 基于所述第一检查操作，确定所述可变物理参数和所述对应物理参数范围之间的物理参数关系以做出用于导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围的所述功能信号是否要被生成的合理决定。Based on the first checking operation, a physical parameter relationship between the variable physical parameter and the corresponding physical parameter range is determined to make the said variable physical parameter entering the physical parameter target range A reasonable decision whether a function signal is to be generated. 6.根据权利要求5所述的方法，其中：6. The method of claim 5, wherein: 所述方法进一步包含步骤：提供感测单元，其中感测所述可变物理参数的步骤通过使用所述感测单元而被执行；The method further comprises the steps of: providing a sensing unit, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter is performed using the sensing unit; 所述感测单元被配置以符合与所述测量值目标范围相关的传感器规格，其中所述传感器规格包含用于表示传感器灵敏度的传感器灵敏度表示，且所述传感器灵敏度相关于由所述感测单元所执行的感测信号生成；The sensing unit is configured to comply with a sensor specification associated with the target range of measurements, wherein the sensor specification includes a sensor sensitivity representation representing a sensor sensitivity relative to the sensor sensitivity determined by the sensing unit the sensed signal generation performed; 所述第一测量值以指定测量值格式而被获得；the first measurement is obtained in a specified measurement format; 所述测量值目标范围具有目标范围阈值对；the measurement target range has target range threshold pairs; 所述对应物理参数范围由对应测量值范围所代表；The corresponding physical parameter range is represented by the corresponding measurement value range; 所述测量值目标范围和所述对应测量值范围的范围组合等于额定测量值范围，其中所述测量值目标范围、所述对应物理参数范围和所述额定测量值范围皆基于所述传感器灵敏度表示来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设，且所述额定测量值范围具有额定范围阈值对；The range combination of the measurement value target range and the corresponding measurement value range is equal to the nominal measurement value range, wherein the measurement value target range, the corresponding physical parameter range and the nominal measurement value range are all expressed based on the sensor sensitivity to be preset with the specified measurement format, and the nominal measurement range has nominal range threshold pairs; 所述控制信号输送所述目标范围阈值对、所述额定范围阈值对和控制码，其中所述控制码基于在所述物理参数目标范围之内的指定物理参数而被预设，且所述控制信号通过输送所述目标范围阈值对来起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用；The control signal conveys the target range threshold pair, the rated range threshold pair, and a control code, wherein the control code is preset based on a specified physical parameter within the physical parameter target range, and the control a signal that serves to indicate the target range of measurements by conveying the target range threshold pair; 执行所述第一检查操作的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of performing the first checking operation includes the following sub-steps: 从所述控制信号获得所述目标范围阈值对；以及obtaining the pair of target range thresholds from the control signal; and 通过比较所述第一测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对，执行所述第一检查操作；performing the first checking operation by comparing the first measurement with the obtained pair of target range thresholds; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 从所述控制信号获得所述额定范围阈值对；以及obtaining the pair of nominal range thresholds from the control signal; and 通过比较所述第一测量值和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对，执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述额定测量值范围之间的第二数学关系的第二检查操作；performing a second checking operation for checking a second mathematical relationship between the first measured value and the nominal measured value range by comparing the first measured value and the obtained nominal range threshold value pair; 确定所述物理参数关系以做出所述合理决定的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of determining the physical parameter relationship to make the rational decision comprises the following sub-steps: 基于所述第一检查操作和所述第二检查操作，做出所述第一测量值是否为于所述对应测量值范围之内的第一逻辑决定；以及based on the first check operation and the second check operation, making a first logical determination of whether the first measurement is within the corresponding measurement range; and 基于所述第一逻辑决定，确定所述物理参数关系以做出所述合理决定；based on the first logical decision, determining the physical parameter relationship to make the reasonable decision; 基于所述第一逻辑决定来确定所述物理参数关系的子步骤包含子步骤：在所述第一逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，辨识所述物理参数关系为物理参数交集关系以做出所述合理决定以成为肯定的；The sub-step of determining the physical parameter relationship based on the first logical decision includes the sub-step of identifying the physical parameter relationship as a physical parameter intersection relationship to make the Reasonably determined to be affirmative; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 从所述控制信号获得所述控制码；obtaining the control code from the control signal; 在所述合理决定是肯定的条件下，基于所获得的所述控制码来执行信号生成控制以生成用于导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围的所述功能信号；performing signal generation control based on the obtained control code to generate the functional signal for causing the variable physical parameter to enter a target range of the physical parameter if the reasonable determination is affirmative; 在所述信号生成控制于操作时间之内被执行之后，感测所述可变物理参数以生成第二感测信号；Sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a second sensed signal after the signal generation control is performed within the operating time; 于所述操作时间之后的指定时间之内，响应所述第二感测信号来以所述指定测量值格式获得第二测量值；以及obtaining a second measurement value in the specified measurement value format in response to the second sensing signal within a specified time after the operating time; and 在所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述物理参数目标范围于所述指定时间之内通过比较所述第二测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对而被确定的条件下，执行确保操作，所述确保操作用于导致代表所确定的所述物理参数目标范围的物理参数目标范围码被记录；Under the condition that the target range of the physical parameter that the variable physical parameter is currently in is determined within the specified time by comparing the second measurement value and the obtained pair of the target range thresholds, ensuring that an operation for causing a physical parameter target range code representing the determined target range of the physical parameter to be recorded; 所述可变物理参数相关于可变时间长度，其中所述可变时间长度基于时间长度参考范围和参考时间长度而被特征化，所述时间长度参考范围由时间长度值参考范围所代表，且所述参考时间长度由时间长度值所代表；the variable physical parameter is related to a variable time length, wherein the variable time length is characterized based on a time length reference range and a reference time length, the time length reference range being represented by a time length value reference range, and the reference duration is represented by a duration value; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述时间长度值；以及the control signal further conveys the time length value; and 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 从所述控制信号获得所述时间长度值；obtaining the time length value from the control signal; 检查所获得的所述时间长度值和所述时间长度值参考范围之间的数值关系以做出用于控制特定时间的计数操作是否要被执行的第二逻辑决定；examining the obtained numerical relationship between the time length value and the time length value reference range to make a second logical decision for controlling whether a counting operation for a specific time is to be performed; 在所述第二逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，基于所获得的所述时间长度值来执行所述计数操作；performing the counting operation based on the obtained time length value under the condition that the second logical decision is affirmative; 在所述可变物理参数由于所述控制信号而被配置以于所述物理参数目标范围之内的条件下，基于所述计数操作来到达所述特定时间；以及The specific time is reached based on the counting operation under the condition that the variable physical parameter is configured due to the control signal to be within a target range of the physical parameter; and 在所述特定时间之内，执行用于导致所述可变物理参数离开所述物理参数目标范围以进入所述对应物理参数范围的信号生成操作。Within the specific time, a signal generation operation is performed for causing the variable physical parameter to leave the physical parameter target range to enter the corresponding physical parameter range. 7.根据权利要求5所述的方法，其中：7. The method of claim 5, wherein: 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 提供感测单元，其中感测所述可变物理参数的步骤通过使用所述感测单元而被执行；以及providing a sensing unit, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter is performed using the sensing unit; and 执行与所述物理参数目标范围相关的物理参数控制功能；performing a physical parameter control function associated with the physical parameter target range; 所述物理参数控制功能被配置以符合与所述物理参数目标范围相关的物理参数控制功能规格；the physical parameter control function is configured to conform to a physical parameter control function specification associated with the physical parameter target range; 所述感测单元被配置以符合与所述测量值目标范围相关的传感器规格，其中所述传感器规格包含用于表示传感器灵敏度的传感器灵敏度表示，且所述传感器灵敏度相关于由所述感测单元所执行的感测信号生成；The sensing unit is configured to comply with a sensor specification associated with the target range of measurements, wherein the sensor specification includes a sensor sensitivity representation representing a sensor sensitivity relative to the sensor sensitivity determined by the sensing unit the sensed signal generation performed; 所述第一测量值以指定测量值格式而被获得，其中所述指定测量值格式基于指定比特数目而被特征化；the first measurement is obtained in a specified measurement format, wherein the specified measurement format is characterized based on a specified number of bits; 所述对应物理参数范围由对应测量值范围所代表；The corresponding physical parameter range is represented by the corresponding measurement value range; 所述物理参数目标范围和所述对应物理参数范围的范围组合等于额定物理参数范围；The range combination of the physical parameter target range and the corresponding physical parameter range is equal to the rated physical parameter range; 所述物理参数控制功能规格包含所述传感器规格、用于表示所述额定物理参数范围的额定物理参数范围表示、和用于表示所述物理参数目标范围的物理参数候选范围表示；The physical parameter control function specification includes the sensor specification, a nominal physical parameter range representation representing the nominal physical parameter range, and a physical parameter candidate range representation representing the physical parameter target range; 所述测量值目标范围和所述对应测量值范围的范围组合等于额定测量值范围；The range combination of the target range of measurement values and the corresponding range of measurement values is equal to the nominal measurement value range; 所述额定测量值范围代表所述额定物理参数范围，基于所述额定物理参数范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述额定物理参数范围表示的第一数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设，并具有额定范围阈值对，其中所述额定范围阈值对用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；The nominal measurement value range represents the nominal physical parameter range for use with the designation based on the nominal physical parameter range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a first data encoding operation for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation measurement value format is preset, and has nominal range threshold value pairs, wherein the nominal range threshold value value pair is preset with the specified measurement value value format; 所述测量值目标范围由测量值目标范围码所代表，并具有目标范围阈值对，其中所述测量值目标范围码基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；the measurement target range is represented by a measurement target range code with target range threshold pairs, wherein the measurement target range code is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述目标范围阈值对包含第一目标范围阈值和相对于所述第一目标范围阈值的第二目标范围阈值，并基于所述物理参数候选范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述物理参数候选范围表示的第二数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；The target range threshold pair includes a first target range threshold and a second target range threshold relative to the first target range threshold, and is based on the physical parameter candidate range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a method for converting the the second data encoding operation represented by the physical parameter candidate range is preset with the specified measurement value format; 所述控制信号通过输送所述测量值目标范围码来起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用，并从控制装置而被接收；The control signal serves to indicate the target range of the measurement value by conveying the target range code of the measurement value, and is received from the control device; 所述物理参数控制功能规格进一步包含物理参数表示，所述物理参数表示用于表示在所述物理参数目标范围之内的指定物理参数；The physical parameter control function specification further includes a physical parameter representation for representing a specified physical parameter within a target range of the physical parameter; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述额定范围阈值对；the control signal further conveys the nominal range threshold pair; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 提供储存空间，其中所述储存空间具有第一存储器位置和不同于所述第一存储器位置的第二存储器位置，且所述第一存储器位置和所述第二存储器位置皆基于所述测量值目标范围码而被识别；providing a storage space, wherein the storage space has a first memory location and a second memory location different from the first memory location, and the first memory location and the second memory location are both based on the measurement target range code is identified; 在所述储存空间中储存所述额定范围阈值对；storing the pair of nominal range thresholds in the storage space; 在所述第一存储器位置储存所述目标范围阈值对；storing the pair of target range thresholds in the first memory location; 在所述第二存储器位置储存控制码，其中所述控制码基于所述物理参数表示和用于转换所述物理参数表示的第三数据编码操作而被预设；以及storing a control code at the second memory location, wherein the control code is preset based on the physical parameter representation and a third data encoding operation for converting the physical parameter representation; and 响应所述控制信号，从所述控制信号和所述储存空间的其中之一获得所述额定范围阈值对；obtaining the pair of rated range thresholds from one of the control signal and the storage space in response to the control signal; 执行所述第一检查操作的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of performing the first checking operation includes the following sub-steps: 响应所述控制信号，从所述控制信号获得所述测量值目标范围码；obtaining the measurement target range code from the control signal in response to the control signal; 通过运行数据获取程序，执行使用所获得的所述测量值目标范围码的数据获取以获得所述目标范围阈值对，其中所述数据获取是第一数据获取操作和第二数据获取操作的其中之一，且所述数据获取程序基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被构建；以及By running a data acquisition program, data acquisition using the obtained measurement value target range codes is performed to obtain the target range threshold pair, wherein the data acquisition is one of a first data acquisition operation and a second data acquisition operation one, and the data acquisition program is constructed based on the physical parameter control functional specification; and 基于所述第一测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对之间的第一数据比较，执行所述第一检查操作；performing the first checking operation based on the first data comparison between the first measurement and the obtained pair of target range thresholds; 所述第一数据获取操作基于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码来存取被储存在所述第一存储器位置的所述目标范围阈值对以获得所述目标范围阈值对；The first data acquisition operation accesses the pair of target range thresholds stored in the first memory location to obtain the pair of target range thresholds based on the obtained measurement target range code; 所述第二数据获取操作通过执行使用所获得的所述测量值目标范围码和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对的科学计算来获得所述目标范围阈值对；The second data acquisition operation obtains the target range threshold pair by performing a scientific calculation using the obtained measurement value target range code and the obtained nominal range threshold pair; 确定所述物理参数关系以做出所述合理决定的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of determining the physical parameter relationship to make the rational decision comprises the following sub-steps: 基于所述第一检查操作，做出所述第一测量值是否为于所述对应测量值范围之内的第一逻辑决定；以及based on the first checking operation, making a first logical determination of whether the first measurement is within the corresponding measurement range; and 基于所述第一逻辑决定，确定所述物理参数关系以做出所述合理决定；determining the physical parameter relationship to make the reasonable decision based on the first logical decision; 基于所述第一逻辑决定来确定所述物理参数关系的子步骤包含子步骤：在所述第一逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，辨识所述物理参数关系为物理参数交集关系以做出所述合理决定以成为肯定的；以及The sub-step of determining the physical parameter relationship based on the first logical decision includes the sub-step of identifying the physical parameter relationship as a physical parameter intersection relationship to make the Reasonably determined to be affirmative; and 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 在所述合理决定是肯定的条件下，基于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码来存取被储存在所述第二存储器位置的所述控制码；accessing the control code stored in the second memory location based on the obtained measurement target range code, if the reasonable determination is positive; 基于所存取的所述控制码，执行用于所述物理参数控制功能的信号生成控制；以及performing signal generation control for the physical parameter control function based on the accessed control code; and 响应所述信号生成控制，执行用于所述物理参数控制功能的信号生成操作以生成所述功能信号，所述功能信号用于导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围。In response to the signal generation control, a signal generation operation for the physical parameter control function is performed to generate the functional signal for causing the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range. 8.根据权利要求7所述的方法，其中：8. The method of claim 7, wherein: 所述控制装置是外部装置；the control device is an external device; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 执行与所述可变物理参数相关的指定功能操作，其中所述指定功能操作用于导致触发事件发生；以及performing a specified functional operation associated with the variable physical parameter, wherein the specified functional operation is used to cause a trigger event to occur; and 通过使用所述控制装置，响应所述触发事件来生成所述控制信号；generating the control signal in response to the trigger event using the control device; 所述额定测量值范围被配置以具有复数不同测量值参考范围，其中所述复数不同测量值参考范围具有总参考范围数目，分别由复数不同测量值参考范围码所代表，并包含所述测量值目标范围；The nominal measurement value range is configured to have a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges, wherein the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges have a total number of reference ranges, each represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference range codes, and containing the measurement values target range; 所述总参考范围数目基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；the total reference range number is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述复数不同测量值参考范围码包含所预设的所述测量值目标范围码，并皆基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；The plurality of different measurement value reference range codes include the preset measurement value target range codes, and are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述总参考范围数目；the control signal further conveys the total reference range number; 所述方法进一步包含步骤：响应所述控制信号，从所述控制信号和所述储存空间的其中之一获得所述总参考范围数目；The method further includes the step of: in response to the control signal, obtaining the total reference range number from one of the control signal and the storage space; 所述科学计算进一步使用所获得的所述总参考范围数目；The scientific calculation further uses the obtained total reference range number; 所述方法进一步包含步骤：响应所述功能信号，将所述可变物理参数从第一特定物理参数改变成第二特定物理参数，其中所述第一特定物理参数是于所述对应物理参数范围之内，且所述第二特定物理参数是于所述物理参数目标范围之内；The method further includes the step of changing the variable physical parameter from a first specific physical parameter to a second specific physical parameter in response to the functional signal, wherein the first specific physical parameter is within the corresponding physical parameter range and the second specific physical parameter is within the target range of the physical parameter; 所述物理参数控制功能规格进一步包含用于表示所述对应物理参数范围的对应物理参数范围表示；The physical parameter control function specification further includes a corresponding physical parameter range representation for representing the corresponding physical parameter range; 所述对应测量值范围基于所述对应物理参数范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述对应物理参数范围表示的第四数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；the corresponding measurement value ranges are preset with the specified measurement value format based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a fourth data encoding operation for converting the corresponding physical parameter range representation; 所述可变物理参数进一步基于所述额定物理参数范围而被特征化；the variable physical parameter is further characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range; 所述额定物理参数范围包含复数不同物理参数参考范围，其中所述复数不同物理参数参考范围包含所述物理参数目标范围；the nominal physical parameter range includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges, wherein the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges include the physical parameter target range; 所述测量值目标范围是所述额定测量值范围的第一部分；the target range of measurements is a first portion of the nominal range of measurements; 所述对应测量值范围是所述额定测量值范围的第二部分，相邻于所述测量值目标范围，并互补于所述测量值目标范围；the corresponding measurement value range is a second portion of the nominal measurement value range, adjacent to the measurement value target range and complementary to the measurement value target range; 所述方法进一步包含步骤：基于所述第一测量值和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对之间的第二数据比较，执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述额定测量值范围之间的第二数学关系的第二检查操作；The method further comprises the step of, based on a second data comparison between the first measurement and the obtained pair of nominal range thresholds, performing a method for checking the first measurement and the nominal range of measurements. a second check operation of the second mathematical relationship between; 确定所述物理参数关系以做出所述合理决定的步骤包含子步骤：基于所述第一检查操作和所述第二检查操作，做出所述第一逻辑决定；The step of determining the physical parameter relationship to make the rational decision comprises the sub-steps of making the first logical decision based on the first checking operation and the second checking operation; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 在所述信号生成控制于操作时间之内被执行之后，感测所述可变物理参数以生成第二感测信号；Sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a second sensed signal after the signal generation control is performed within the operating time; 于所述操作时间之后的指定时间之内，响应所述第二感测信号来以所述指定测量值格式获得第二测量值；obtaining a second measurement value in the specified measurement value format in response to the second sensing signal within a specified time after the operation time; 通过比较所述第二测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对，检查所述第二测量值和所述测量值目标范围之间的第三数学关系以做出所述第二测量值是否为于所述测量值目标范围之内的第二逻辑决定；By comparing the second measurement and the obtained target range threshold pair, a third mathematical relationship between the second measurement and the target range of measurements is checked to determine whether the second measurement is for a second logical decision within said measurement target range; 在所述第二逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，于所述指定时间之内确定所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述物理参数目标范围，并生成肯定操作报告，其中所述肯定操作报告表示所述可变物理参数成功地进入所述物理参数目标范围的操作情况；以及Under the condition that the second logical decision is affirmative, within the specified time, determine the target range of the physical parameter that the variable physical parameter is currently in, and generate a positive operation report, wherein the positive operation report indicates that an operational condition in which the variable physical parameter successfully enters the target range of the physical parameter; and 输出输送所述肯定操作报告的控制回应信号，藉此所述控制回应信号用于导致所述控制装置获得所述肯定操作报告；outputting a control response signal conveying the positive operation report, whereby the control response signal is used to cause the control device to obtain the positive operation report; 所述方法进一步包含步骤：在所述储存空间中储存可变物理参数范围码；The method further comprises the steps of: storing variable physical parameter range codes in the storage space; 当所述控制信号被接收时，所述可变物理参数范围码等于选择自所述复数不同测量值参考范围码的特定测量值范围码，其中所述特定测量值范围码指示基于感测操作而被先前确定的特定物理参数范围，所述特定物理参数范围选择自所述复数不同物理参数参考范围，且由所述感测单元所执行的所述感测操作用于感测所述可变物理参数；When the control signal is received, the variable physical parameter range code is equal to a specific measurement value range code selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes, wherein the specific measurement value range code indicates that based on the sensing operation a previously determined specific physical parameter range selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges and the sensing operation performed by the sensing unit for sensing the variable physical parameter parameter; 在所述输入单元接收所述控制信号之前，所述特定测量值范围码被指定到所述可变物理参数范围码；The specific measurement value range code is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code before the input unit receives the control signal; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 在所述特定测量值范围码不同于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码且所述物理参数目标范围通过做出所述第二逻辑决定而被确定的条件下，基于等于所述特定测量值范围码的所述可变物理参数范围码和所获得的所述测量值目标范围码之间的第一码差异来将所获得的所述测量值目标范围码指定到所述可变物理参数范围码；on condition that the specific measurement range code is different from the obtained measurement target range code and the physical parameter target range is determined by making the second logical decision, based on being equal to the specific measurement a first code difference between the variable physical parameter range code of the range code and the obtained measurement target range code to assign the obtained measurement target range code to the variable physical parameter range code; 当所述控制信号被接收时，显示第一状态指示，其中所述第一状态指示用于指示所述可变物理参数被配置于所述特定物理参数范围之内的第一特定状态；以及When the control signal is received, displaying a first state indication, wherein the first state indication is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter is configured in a first specific state within the specific physical parameter range; and 在所述特定测量值范围码不同于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码且所述物理参数目标范围通过做出所述第二逻辑决定而被确定的条件下，基于所述第一码差异来将所述第一状态指示改变成第二状态指示，其中所述第二状态指示用于指示所述可变物理参数被配置于所述物理参数目标范围之内的第二特定状态；on the condition that the specific measurement range code is different from the obtained measurement target range code and the physical parameter target range is determined by making the second logical decision, based on the first code difference to change the first state indication to a second state indication, wherein the second state indication is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter is configured in a second specific state within a target range of the physical parameter; 所述控制信号是电信号和光信号的其中之一；the control signal is one of an electrical signal and an optical signal; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 在所述控制信号是所述电信号的条件下，从输送控制信息的所述电信号获得所述控制信息，其中所述控制信息包含所述测量值目标范围码；obtaining the control information from the electrical signal conveying control information under the condition that the control signal is the electrical signal, wherein the control information includes the measurement target range code; 在所述控制信号是所述光信号的条件下，通过感测由所述光信号所输送的编码影像来确定编码数据，并解码所述编码数据以获得所述控制信息，其中所述编码影像代表所述控制信息；Encoded data is determined by sensing an encoded image conveyed by the optical signal, provided that the control signal is the optical signal, and decoding the encoded data to obtain the control information, wherein the encoded image represent said control information; 在所述可变物理参数由于所述控制信号而被配置于所述物理参数目标范围之内的条件下，接收使用者输入操作；receiving a user input operation under the condition that the variable physical parameter is configured within the target range of the physical parameter due to the control signal; 响应所述使用者输入操作，确定特定输入码，其中所述特定输入码选择自所述复数不同测量值参考范围码；以及determining a specific input code in response to the user input operation, wherein the specific input code is selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes; and 在所述特定输入码不同于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码的条件下，基于等于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码的所述可变物理参数范围码和所述特定输入码之间的第二码差异来导致所述可变物理参数离开所述物理参数目标范围以进入所述对应物理参数范围；Under the condition that the specific input code is different from the preset measurement value target range code, based on the variable physical parameter range code equal to the obtained measurement value target range code and the specific input code a second code difference between to cause the variable physical parameter to leave the physical parameter target range to enter the corresponding physical parameter range; 感测所述可变物理参数的步骤包含子步骤：感测处于拘束条件的所述可变物理参数以生成所述第一感测信号，其中所述拘束条件是所述可变物理参数等于包含于所述额定物理参数范围中的第三特定物理参数；The step of sensing the variable physical parameter includes the sub-step of sensing the variable physical parameter under a constraint condition to generate the first sensed signal, wherein the constraint condition is that the variable physical parameter is equal to including a third specific physical parameter in the rated physical parameter range; 响应所述第一感测信号来获得所述第一测量值的步骤包含子步骤：基于所述第一感测信号，估计所述第三特定物理参数以获得所述第一测量值；The step of obtaining the first measurement value in response to the first sensed signal includes the sub-steps of estimating the third specific physical parameter to obtain the first measurement value based on the first sensed signal; 在所述第一测量值基于所述第一数据比较和所述第二数据比较而被辨识为于所述测量值目标范围之外并于所述额定测量值范围之内的可允许值的条件下，所述第一逻辑决定被做出以成为肯定的；以及The condition under which the first measurement value is identified as an allowable value outside the target range of measurement values and within the nominal measurement value range based on the first data comparison and the second data comparison , the first logical decision is made to be affirmative; and 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 在所述控制信号被接收之前，接收包含所预设的所述目标范围阈值对和第一存储器位址的第一写入请求信息，其中所述第一存储器位置基于所述第一存储器位址而被识别，且所述第一存储器位址基于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码而被预设；Before the control signal is received, first write request information is received including a preset pair of the target range threshold and a first memory address, wherein the first memory location is based on the first memory address is identified, and the first memory address is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code; 响应所述第一写入请求信息，将所述第一写入请求信息的所述目标范围阈值对储存到所述第一存储器位置；responsive to the first write request information, storing the pair of target range thresholds of the first write request information to the first memory location; 在所述控制信号被接收之前，接收包含所预设的所述控制码和第二存储器位址的第二写入请求信息，其中所述第二存储器位置基于所述第二存储器位址而被识别，且所述第二存储器位址基于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码而被预设；以及Before the control signal is received, second write request information including the preset control code and a second memory address is received, wherein the second memory location is determined based on the second memory address identifying, and the second memory address is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code; and 响应所述第二写入请求信息，将所述第二写入请求信息的所述控制码储存到所述第二存储器位置。The control code of the second write request message is stored in the second memory location in response to the second write request message. 9.一种用于控制可变物理参数的方法，其中所述可变物理参数基于由测量值目标范围所代表的物理参数目标范围和对应于所述物理参数目标范围的对应物理参数范围而被特征化，所述方法包含下列步骤：9. A method for controlling a variable physical parameter, wherein the variable physical parameter is determined based on a physical parameter target range represented by a measurement value target range and a corresponding physical parameter range corresponding to the physical parameter target range. Characterization, the method includes the following steps: 感测所述可变物理参数以生成第一感测信号；sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensed signal; 在起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用的控制信号被接收的条件下，响应所述第一感测信号来获得第一测量值；obtaining a first measurement in response to the first sensed signal under a condition that a control signal serving to indicate the target range of the measurement is received; 响应所述控制信号，执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述测量值目标范围之间的第一数学关系的第一检查操作；以及responsive to the control signal, performing a first checking operation for checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement and the target range of measurements; and 在所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述对应物理参数范围基于所述第一检查操作而被确定的条件下，导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围。The variable physical parameter is caused to enter the physical parameter target range under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range in which the variable physical parameter is currently located is determined based on the first checking operation. 10.根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中：10. The method of claim 9, wherein: 所述方法进一步包含步骤：提供感测单元，其中感测所述可变物理参数的步骤通过使用所述感测单元而被执行；The method further comprises the steps of: providing a sensing unit, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter is performed using the sensing unit; 所述感测单元被配置以符合与所述测量值目标范围相关的传感器规格，其中所述传感器规格包含用于表示传感器灵敏度的传感器灵敏度表示，且所述传感器灵敏度相关于由所述感测单元所执行的感测信号生成；The sensing unit is configured to comply with a sensor specification associated with the target range of measurements, wherein the sensor specification includes a sensor sensitivity representation representing a sensor sensitivity relative to the sensor sensitivity determined by the sensing unit the sensed signal generation performed; 所述第一测量值以指定测量值格式而被获得；the first measurement is obtained in a specified measurement format; 所述测量值目标范围具有目标范围阈值对；the measurement target range has target range threshold pairs; 所述对应物理参数范围由对应测量值范围所代表；The corresponding physical parameter range is represented by the corresponding measurement value range; 所述测量值目标范围和所述对应测量值范围的范围组合等于额定测量值范围，其中所述测量值目标范围、所述对应物理参数范围和所述额定测量值范围皆基于所述传感器灵敏度表示来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设，且所述额定测量值范围具有额定范围阈值对；The range combination of the measurement value target range and the corresponding measurement value range is equal to the nominal measurement value range, wherein the measurement value target range, the corresponding physical parameter range and the nominal measurement value range are all expressed based on the sensor sensitivity to be preset with the specified measurement format, and the nominal measurement range has nominal range threshold pairs; 所述控制信号输送所述目标范围阈值对、所述额定范围阈值对和控制码，其中所述控制码基于在所述物理参数目标范围之内的指定物理参数而被预设，且所述控制信号通过输送所述目标范围阈值对来起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用；The control signal conveys the target range threshold pair, the rated range threshold pair, and a control code, wherein the control code is preset based on a specified physical parameter within the physical parameter target range, and the control a signal that serves to indicate the target range of measurements by conveying the target range threshold pair; 执行所述第一检查操作的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of performing the first checking operation includes the following sub-steps: 从所述控制信号获得所述目标范围阈值对；以及obtaining the pair of target range thresholds from the control signal; and 通过比较所述第一测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对，执行所述第一检查操作；performing the first checking operation by comparing the first measurement with the obtained pair of target range thresholds; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 从所述控制信号获得所述额定范围阈值对；以及obtaining the pair of nominal range thresholds from the control signal; and 通过比较所述第一测量值和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对，执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述额定测量值范围之间的第二数学关系的第二检查操作；performing a second checking operation for checking a second mathematical relationship between the first measured value and the nominal measured value range by comparing the first measured value and the obtained nominal range threshold value pair; 导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of causing the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range comprises the following sub-steps: 基于所述第一检查操作和所述第二检查操作，做出所述第一测量值是否为于所述对应测量值范围之内的第一逻辑决定；based on the first check operation and the second check operation, making a first logical decision whether the first measurement value is within the corresponding measurement value range; 在所述第一逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，确定所述对应物理参数范围；determining the corresponding physical parameter range under the condition that the first logical decision is affirmative; 从所述控制信号获得所述控制码；以及obtaining the control code from the control signal; and 在所述对应物理参数范围被确定的条件下，基于所获得的所述控制码来执行信号生成控制以生成用于导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围的功能信号；performing signal generation control based on the obtained control code to generate a functional signal for causing the variable physical parameter to enter the target range of the physical parameter under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range is determined; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 在所述信号生成控制于操作时间之内被执行之后，感测所述可变物理参数以生成第二感测信号；Sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a second sensed signal after the signal generation control is performed within the operating time; 于所述操作时间之后的指定时间之内，响应所述第二感测信号来以所述指定测量值格式获得第二测量值；以及obtaining a second measurement value in the specified measurement value format in response to the second sensing signal within a specified time after the operating time; and 在所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述物理参数目标范围于所述指定时间之内通过比较所述第二测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对而被确定的条件下，执行确保操作，所述确保操作用于导致代表所确定的所述物理参数目标范围的物理参数目标范围码被记录；Under the condition that the physical parameter target range in which the variable physical parameter is currently in is determined within the specified time by comparing the second measured value and the obtained target range threshold pair, performing a ensuring an operation for causing a physical parameter target range code representing the determined target range of the physical parameter to be recorded; 所述可变物理参数相关于可变时间长度，其中所述可变时间长度基于时间长度参考范围和参考时间长度而被特征化，所述时间长度参考范围由时间长度值参考范围所代表，且所述参考时间长度由时间长度值所代表；the variable physical parameter is related to a variable time length, wherein the variable time length is characterized based on a time length reference range and a reference time length, the time length reference range being represented by a time length value reference range, and the reference duration is represented by a duration value; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述时间长度值；以及the control signal further conveys the time length value; and 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 从所述控制信号获得所述时间长度值；obtaining the time length value from the control signal; 检查所获得的所述时间长度值和所述时间长度值参考范围之间的数值关系以做出用于控制特定时间的计数操作是否要被执行的第二逻辑决定；examining the obtained numerical relationship between the time length value and the time length value reference range to make a second logical decision for controlling whether a counting operation for a particular time is to be performed; 在所述第二逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，基于所获得的所述时间长度值来执行所述计数操作；performing the counting operation based on the obtained time length value under the condition that the second logical decision is affirmative; 在所述可变物理参数由于所述控制信号而被配置以于所述物理参数目标范围之内的条件下，基于所述计数操作来到达所述特定时间；以及The specific time is reached based on the counting operation under the condition that the variable physical parameter is configured due to the control signal to be within a target range of the physical parameter; and 在所述特定时间之内，执行用于导致所述可变物理参数离开所述物理参数目标范围以进入所述对应物理参数范围的信号生成操作。Within the specific time, a signal generation operation is performed for causing the variable physical parameter to leave the physical parameter target range to enter the corresponding physical parameter range. 11.根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中：11. The method of claim 9, wherein: 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 提供感测单元，其中感测所述可变物理参数的步骤通过使用所述感测单元而被执行；以及providing a sensing unit, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter is performed using the sensing unit; and 执行与所述物理参数目标范围相关的物理参数控制功能；performing a physical parameter control function associated with the physical parameter target range; 所述物理参数控制功能被配置以符合与所述物理参数目标范围相关的物理参数控制功能规格；the physical parameter control function is configured to conform to a physical parameter control function specification associated with the physical parameter target range; 所述感测单元被配置以符合与所述测量值目标范围相关的传感器规格，其中所述传感器规格包含用于表示传感器灵敏度的传感器灵敏度表示，且所述传感器灵敏度相关于由所述感测单元所执行的感测信号生成；The sensing unit is configured to comply with a sensor specification associated with the target range of measurements, wherein the sensor specification includes a sensor sensitivity representation representing a sensor sensitivity relative to the sensor sensitivity determined by the sensing unit the sensed signal generation performed; 所述第一测量值以指定测量值格式而被获得，其中所述指定测量值格式基于指定比特数目而被特征化；the first measurement is obtained in a specified measurement format, wherein the specified measurement format is characterized based on a specified number of bits; 所述对应物理参数范围由对应测量值范围所代表；The corresponding physical parameter range is represented by the corresponding measurement value range; 所述物理参数目标范围和所述对应物理参数范围的范围组合等于额定物理参数范围；The range combination of the physical parameter target range and the corresponding physical parameter range is equal to the rated physical parameter range; 所述物理参数控制功能规格包含所述传感器规格、用于表示所述额定物理参数范围的额定物理参数范围表示、和用于表示所述物理参数目标范围的物理参数候选范围表示；The physical parameter control function specification includes the sensor specification, a nominal physical parameter range representation representing the nominal physical parameter range, and a physical parameter candidate range representation representing the physical parameter target range; 所述测量值目标范围和所述对应测量值范围的范围组合等于额定测量值范围；The range combination of the target range of measurement values and the corresponding range of measurement values is equal to the nominal measurement value range; 所述额定测量值范围代表所述额定物理参数范围，基于所述额定物理参数范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述额定物理参数范围表示的第一数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设，并具有额定范围阈值对，其中所述额定范围阈值对用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；The nominal measurement value range represents the nominal physical parameter range for use with the designation based on the nominal physical parameter range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a first data encoding operation for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation measurement value format is preset, and has nominal range threshold value pairs, wherein the nominal range threshold value value pair is preset with the specified measurement value value format; 所述测量值目标范围由测量值目标范围码所代表，并具有目标范围阈值对，其中所述测量值目标范围码基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；the measurement target range is represented by a measurement target range code with target range threshold pairs, wherein the measurement target range code is preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述目标范围阈值对包含第一目标范围阈值和相对于所述第一目标范围阈值的第二目标范围阈值，并基于所述物理参数候选范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述物理参数候选范围表示的第二数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；The target range threshold pair includes a first target range threshold and a second target range threshold relative to the first target range threshold, and is based on the physical parameter candidate range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a method for converting the the second data encoding operation represented by the physical parameter candidate range is preset with the specified measurement value format; 所述控制信号通过输送所述测量值目标范围码来起到指示所述测量值目标范围的作用，并从控制装置而被接收；The control signal serves to indicate the target range of the measurement value by conveying the target range code of the measurement value, and is received from the control device; 所述物理参数控制功能规格进一步包含物理参数表示，所述物理参数表示用于表示在所述物理参数目标范围之内的指定物理参数；The physical parameter control function specification further includes a physical parameter representation for representing a specified physical parameter within a target range of the physical parameter; 所述控制信号进一步输送所述额定范围阈值对；the control signal further conveys the nominal range threshold pair; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 提供储存空间，其中所述储存空间具有第一存储器位置和不同于所述第一存储器位置的第二存储器位置，且所述第一存储器位置和所述第二存储器位置皆基于所述测量值目标范围码而被识别；providing a storage space, wherein the storage space has a first memory location and a second memory location different from the first memory location, and the first memory location and the second memory location are both based on the measurement target range code is identified; 在所述储存空间中储存所述额定范围阈值对；storing the pair of nominal range thresholds in the storage space; 在所述第一存储器位置储存所述目标范围阈值对；storing the pair of target range thresholds in the first memory location; 在所述第二存储器位置储存控制码，其中所述控制码基于所述物理参数表示和用于转换所述物理参数表示的第三数据编码操作而被预设；以及storing a control code at the second memory location, wherein the control code is preset based on the physical parameter representation and a third data encoding operation for converting the physical parameter representation; and 响应所述控制信号，从所述控制信号和所述储存空间的其中之一获得所述额定范围阈值对；obtaining the pair of rated range thresholds from one of the control signal and the storage space in response to the control signal; 执行所述第一检查操作的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of performing the first checking operation includes the following sub-steps: 响应所述控制信号，从所述控制信号获得所述测量值目标范围码；obtaining the measurement target range code from the control signal in response to the control signal; 通过运行数据获取程序，执行使用所获得的所述测量值目标范围码的数据获取以获得所述目标范围阈值对，其中所述数据获取是第一数据获取操作和第二数据获取操作的其中之一，且所述数据获取程序基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被构建；以及By running a data acquisition program, data acquisition using the obtained measurement value target range codes is performed to obtain the target range threshold pair, wherein the data acquisition is one of a first data acquisition operation and a second data acquisition operation one, and the data acquisition program is constructed based on the physical parameter control functional specification; and 基于所述第一测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对之间的第一数据比较，执行所述第一检查操作；performing the first checking operation based on the first data comparison between the first measurement and the obtained pair of target range thresholds; 所述第一数据获取操作基于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码来存取被储存在所述第一存储器位置的所述目标范围阈值对以获得所述目标范围阈值对；The first data acquisition operation accesses the pair of target range thresholds stored in the first memory location to obtain the pair of target range thresholds based on the obtained measurement target range code; 所述第二数据获取操作通过执行使用所获得的所述测量值目标范围码和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对的科学计算来获得所述目标范围阈值对；以及The second data acquisition operation obtains the target range threshold pair by performing a scientific calculation using the obtained measurement value target range code and the obtained nominal range threshold pair; and 导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围的步骤包含下列子步骤：The step of causing the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range comprises the following sub-steps: 基于所述第一检查操作，做出所述第一测量值是否为于所述对应测量值范围之内的第一逻辑决定；based on the first checking operation, making a first logical determination of whether the first measurement is within the corresponding measurement range; 在所述第一逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，确定所述对应物理参数范围；Under the condition that the first logical decision is affirmative, determine the corresponding physical parameter range; 在所述对应物理参数范围被确定的条件下，基于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码来存取被储存在所述第二存储器位置的所述控制码；accessing the control code stored in the second memory location based on the obtained measurement target range code under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range is determined; 基于所存取的所述控制码，执行用于所述物理参数控制功能的信号生成控制；以及performing signal generation control for the physical parameter control function based on the accessed control code; and 响应所述信号生成控制，执行用于所述物理参数控制功能的信号生成操作以生成功能信号，所述功能信号用于导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围。In response to the signal generation control, a signal generation operation for the physical parameter control function is performed to generate a functional signal for causing the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range. 12.根据权利要求11所述的方法，其中：12. The method of claim 11, wherein: 所述控制装置是外部装置；the control device is an external device; 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 执行与所述可变物理参数相关的指定功能操作，其中所述指定功能操作用于导致触发事件发生；以及performing a specified functional operation associated with the variable physical parameter, wherein the specified functional operation is used to cause a trigger event to occur; and 通过使用所述控制装置，响应所述触发事件来生成所述控制信号；generating the control signal in response to the trigger event using the control device; 所述额定测量值范围被配置以具有复数不同测量值参考范围，其中所述复数不同测量值参考范围分别由复数不同测量值参考范围码所代表，并包含所述测量值目标范围；the nominal measurement value range is configured to have a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges, wherein the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges are respectively represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference range codes and include the measurement value target range; 所述复数不同测量值参考范围码包含所预设的所述测量值目标范围码，并皆基于所述物理参数控制功能规格而被预设；The plurality of different measurement value reference range codes include the preset measurement value target range codes, and are all preset based on the physical parameter control function specification; 所述物理参数控制功能规格进一步包含用于表示所述对应物理参数范围的对应物理参数范围表示；The physical parameter control function specification further includes a corresponding physical parameter range representation for representing the corresponding physical parameter range; 所述对应测量值范围基于所述对应物理参数范围表示、所述传感器灵敏度表示和用于转换所述对应物理参数范围表示的第四数据编码操作来用所述指定测量值格式而被预设；the corresponding measurement value ranges are preset with the specified measurement value format based on the corresponding physical parameter range representation, the sensor sensitivity representation, and a fourth data encoding operation for converting the corresponding physical parameter range representation; 所述可变物理参数进一步基于所述额定物理参数范围而被特征化；the variable physical parameter is further characterized based on the nominal physical parameter range; 所述额定物理参数范围包含复数不同物理参数参考范围，其中所述复数不同物理参数参考范围包含所述物理参数目标范围；the nominal physical parameter range includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges, wherein the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges include the physical parameter target range; 所述方法进一步包含步骤：在所述储存空间中储存可变物理参数范围码；The method further comprises the steps of: storing variable physical parameter range codes in the storage space; 当所述控制信号被接收时，所述可变物理参数范围码等于选择自所述复数不同测量值参考范围码的特定测量值范围码，其中所述特定测量值范围码指示基于感测操作而被先前确定的特定物理参数范围，所述特定物理参数范围选择自所述复数不同物理参数参考范围，且由所述感测单元所执行的所述感测操作用于感测所述可变物理参数；When the control signal is received, the variable physical parameter range code is equal to a specific measurement value range code selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes, wherein the specific measurement value range code indicates that based on the sensing operation a previously determined specific physical parameter range selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges and the sensing operation performed by the sensing unit for sensing the variable physical parameter parameter; 在所述输入单元接收所述控制信号之前，所述特定测量值范围码被指定到所述可变物理参数范围码；The specific measurement value range code is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code before the input unit receives the control signal; 所述方法进一步包含步骤：基于所述第一测量值和所获得的所述额定范围阈值对之间的第二数据比较，执行用于检查所述第一测量值和所述额定测量值范围之间的第二数学关系的第二检查操作；The method further comprises the step of, based on a second data comparison between the first measurement and the obtained pair of nominal range thresholds, performing a method for checking the first measurement and the nominal range of measurements. a second check operation of the second mathematical relationship between; 导致所述可变物理参数进入所述物理参数目标范围的步骤包含子步骤：基于所述第一检查操作和所述第二检查操作，做出所述第一逻辑决定；The step of causing the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range includes the sub-steps of making the first logical decision based on the first check operation and the second check operation; 在所述第一测量值基于所述第一数据比较和所述第二数据比较而被辨识为于所述测量值目标范围之外并于所述额定测量值范围之内的可允许值的条件下，所述第一逻辑决定被做出成为肯定的；以及The condition under which the first measurement value is identified as an allowable value outside the target range of measurement values and within the nominal measurement value range based on the first data comparison and the second data comparison , the first logical decision is made affirmative; and 所述方法进一步包含下列步骤：The method further comprises the steps of: 在所述信号生成控制于操作时间之内被执行之后，感测所述可变物理参数以生成第二感测信号；Sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a second sensed signal after the signal generation control is performed within the operating time; 于所述操作时间之后的指定时间之内，响应所述第二感测信号来以所述指定测量值格式获得第二测量值；obtaining a second measurement value in the specified measurement value format in response to the second sensing signal within a specified time after the operation time; 通过比较所述第二测量值和所获得的所述目标范围阈值对，检查所述第二测量值和所述测量值目标范围之间的第三数学关系以做出所述第二测量值是否为于所述测量值目标范围之内的第二逻辑决定；By comparing the second measurement and the obtained target range threshold pair, a third mathematical relationship between the second measurement and the target range of measurements is checked to determine whether the second measurement is for a second logical decision within said measurement target range; 在所述第二逻辑决定是肯定的条件下，于所述指定时间之内确定所述可变物理参数目前处于的所述物理参数目标范围，并生成肯定操作报告，其中所述肯定操作报告表示所述可变物理参数成功地进入所述物理参数目标范围的操作情况；Under the condition that the second logical decision is affirmative, within the specified time, determine the target range of the physical parameter that the variable physical parameter is currently in, and generate a positive operation report, wherein the positive operation report indicates that an operational condition in which the variable physical parameter successfully enters the target range of the physical parameter; 输出输送所述肯定操作报告的控制回应信号，藉此所述控制回应信号用于导致所述控制装置获得所述肯定操作报告；outputting a control response signal conveying the positive operation report, whereby the control response signal is used to cause the control device to obtain the positive operation report; 在所述特定测量值范围码不同于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码且所述物理参数目标范围通过做出所述第二逻辑决定而被确定的条件下，基于等于所述特定测量值范围码的所述可变物理参数范围码和所获得的所述测量值目标范围码之间的码差异来将所获得的所述测量值目标范围码指定到所述可变物理参数范围码；on condition that the specific measurement range code is different from the obtained measurement target range code and the physical parameter target range is determined by making the second logical decision, based on being equal to the specific measurement a code difference between the variable physical parameter range code of the range code and the obtained measurement target range code to assign the obtained measurement target range code to the variable physical parameter range code; 当所述控制信号被接收时，显示第一状态指示，其中所述第一状态指示用于指示所述可变物理参数被配置于所述特定物理参数范围之内的第一特定状态；When the control signal is received, displaying a first state indication, wherein the first state indication is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter is configured in a first specific state within the specific physical parameter range; 在所述特定测量值范围码不同于所获得的所述测量值目标范围码且所述物理参数目标范围通过做出所述第二逻辑决定而被确定的条件下，基于所述码差异来将所述第一状态指示改变成第二状态指示，其中所述第二状态指示用于指示所述可变物理参数被配置于所述物理参数目标范围之内的第二特定状态；Under the condition that the specific measurement value range code is different from the obtained measurement value target range code and the physical parameter target range is determined by making the second logical decision, based on the code difference the first state indication is changed to a second state indication, wherein the second state indication is used to indicate a second specific state in which the variable physical parameter is configured within a target range of the physical parameter; 在所述控制信号被接收之前，接收包含所预设的所述目标范围阈值对和第一存储器位址的第一写入请求信息，其中所述第一存储器位置基于所述第一存储器位址而被识别，且所述第一存储器位址基于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码而被预设；Before the control signal is received, first write request information is received including a preset pair of the target range threshold and a first memory address, wherein the first memory location is based on the first memory address is identified, and the first memory address is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code; 响应所述第一写入请求信息，将所述第一写入请求信息的所述目标范围阈值对储存到所述第一存储器位置；responsive to the first write request information, storing the pair of target range thresholds for the first write request information to the first memory location; 在所述控制信号被接收之前，接收包含所预设的所述控制码和第二存储器位址的第二写入请求信息，其中所述第二存储器位置基于所述第二存储器位址而被识别，且所述第二存储器位址基于所预设的所述测量值目标范围码而被预设；以及Before the control signal is received, second write request information including the preset control code and a second memory address is received, wherein the second memory location is determined based on the second memory address identifying, and the second memory address is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code; and 响应所述第二写入请求信息，将所述第二写入请求信息的所述控制码储存到所述第二存储器位置。The control code of the second write request message is stored in the second memory location in response to the second write request message.
CN201911421090.0A 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter Withdrawn CN113126482A (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201911421090.0A CN113126482A (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
PCT/CN2020/141401 WO2021136374A1 (en) 2019-12-31 2020-12-30 Control target apparatus and method for controlling variable physical parameters
CN202080091274.XA CN114930255A (en) 2019-12-31 2020-12-30 Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameters

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201911421090.0A CN113126482A (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN113126482A true CN113126482A (en) 2021-07-16

Family

ID=76769517

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201911421090.0A Withdrawn CN113126482A (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter

Country Status (1)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113126482A (en)

Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05206820A (en) * 1991-04-19 1993-08-13 Keyence Corp Method and device for controlling sensitivity of photoelectric switch
EP1342393A1 (en) * 2000-11-02 2003-09-10 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Digital ballast
CN2591746Y (en) * 2002-12-25 2003-12-10 钟国城 Electronic device with one-finger control keys
TW200506738A (en) * 2003-07-01 2005-02-16 Em Microelectronic Marin Sa Method and system for optimizing illumination power and integration time in an optical sensing device
CN102112201A (en) * 2008-07-29 2011-06-29 普莱克斯技术有限公司 Adsorbent bed repressurization control method
RU2010111738A (en) * 2010-03-26 2011-10-10 Ирина Владимировна Куртис (UA) SYSTEM OF AUTOMATIC REGULATION OF INTERNAL CAPACITIVE ENERGY OF OBJECT WITH VARIABLE PARAMETERS
CN103428439A (en) * 2013-08-22 2013-12-04 浙江宇视科技有限公司 Automatic exposure control method and device for imaging equipment
CN103596324A (en) * 2012-08-16 2014-02-19 Lg伊诺特有限公司 Lighting control system
CN103735401A (en) * 2013-10-11 2014-04-23 中国医学科学院北京协和医院 Cardio-pulmonary resuscitation quality feedback control system based on pulse blood oxygen
US20160131472A1 (en) * 2014-11-10 2016-05-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Optical measurement system and method for measuring critical dimension of nanostructure
CN106465499A (en) * 2014-05-22 2017-02-22 莱弗实验室公司 Directional lighting system and method
CN108162848A (en) * 2016-12-07 2018-06-15 丰田自动车株式会社 Headlight controls data generating device and controller of vehicle
CN110138717A (en) * 2018-02-02 2019-08-16 钟国诚 For transmitting the electronic device and method of electronic data

Patent Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05206820A (en) * 1991-04-19 1993-08-13 Keyence Corp Method and device for controlling sensitivity of photoelectric switch
EP1342393A1 (en) * 2000-11-02 2003-09-10 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Digital ballast
CN2591746Y (en) * 2002-12-25 2003-12-10 钟国城 Electronic device with one-finger control keys
TW200506738A (en) * 2003-07-01 2005-02-16 Em Microelectronic Marin Sa Method and system for optimizing illumination power and integration time in an optical sensing device
CN102112201A (en) * 2008-07-29 2011-06-29 普莱克斯技术有限公司 Adsorbent bed repressurization control method
RU2010111738A (en) * 2010-03-26 2011-10-10 Ирина Владимировна Куртис (UA) SYSTEM OF AUTOMATIC REGULATION OF INTERNAL CAPACITIVE ENERGY OF OBJECT WITH VARIABLE PARAMETERS
CN103596324A (en) * 2012-08-16 2014-02-19 Lg伊诺特有限公司 Lighting control system
CN103428439A (en) * 2013-08-22 2013-12-04 浙江宇视科技有限公司 Automatic exposure control method and device for imaging equipment
CN103735401A (en) * 2013-10-11 2014-04-23 中国医学科学院北京协和医院 Cardio-pulmonary resuscitation quality feedback control system based on pulse blood oxygen
CN106465499A (en) * 2014-05-22 2017-02-22 莱弗实验室公司 Directional lighting system and method
US20160131472A1 (en) * 2014-11-10 2016-05-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Optical measurement system and method for measuring critical dimension of nanostructure
CN108162848A (en) * 2016-12-07 2018-06-15 丰田自动车株式会社 Headlight controls data generating device and controller of vehicle
CN110138717A (en) * 2018-02-02 2019-08-16 钟国诚 For transmitting the electronic device and method of electronic data

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ROBERT MARTIN C. SANTIAGO 等: "Multiple Obj ective Optimization of LED Lighting System Design Using Genetic Algorithm", 《2017 FIFTH INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY (ICOICT》 *
李伟伟: "基于OPC的室内环境自动调节系统研究", 《中国优秀硕士学位论文全文数据库信息科技辑》 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10748390B2 (en) Dynamic haptic generation based on detected video events
KR102706928B1 (en) Method for recommending word and apparatus thereof
CN105242780B (en) A kind of interaction control method and device
CN113126482A (en) Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
CN113126481A (en) Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
CN113126486A (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameters
US20230039885A1 (en) Functional device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
CN108540651A (en) A kind of the recommendation method and mobile terminal of application program
CN113126539A (en) Functional device and method for controlling variable physical parameters
US10420058B2 (en) Data-driven sensor configuration and information processing
CN114930257B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameters
KR101570428B1 (en) Central control apparatus and facility control system
EP4411544A1 (en) Electronic device and operation method thereof
WO2021136374A1 (en) Control target apparatus and method for controlling variable physical parameters
TW202127158A (en) Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TW202518185A (en) Control device and functional device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
JP2018161357A (en) Beacon transmission device and network system provided with the same
TWI734335B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TWI798812B (en) Control device and method for controlling illuminating device
EP3316186B1 (en) Controlling display of data to a person via a display apparatus
TWI775592B (en) Control device and method for controlling illuminating device
US11985216B2 (en) Electronic device and method for sending electronic data
KR102813627B1 (en) Electronic device for transmitting or receiving signal to or from devices in communication group based on information obtained from external device and controlling method thereof
US12001752B1 (en) Voice assistance in virtual reality environments and augmented reality environments
KR20210098184A (en) Final location arrival notification system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
WW01 Invention patent application withdrawn after publication

Application publication date: 20210716

WW01 Invention patent application withdrawn after publication